Home
        - AskTOP.net
         Contents
1.                                                                                                                           Figure 052 260 1235 1  Sample of DA Form 1940 With Block Numbers                               F COMPUTED BY    CHECKED BY     23         1940    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    PROJECT TABULATION OF GEODETIC DATA  Example 1  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC    Fort Belvoir  VA   DMS  Fort Belvoir   Fort Belvoir  VA    STATION  Third Order  Class 1 Traverse Tildon to Abbot                          Tildon    AZ  T  Abbot      Abbot AZ mark    154  32 02 9         Tildon       263  24 13 6   149  47 12 2    281  21 15 3         152  22 39 3   323  42 12 5            Air Force        Geodetic Distance   Tildon Air Force 1 613 478   Air Force Army 3 777 908  Army Marine    724 196   Horizontal tape  Marine Abbot 112 372    TABULATED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD    CHECKED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD   GySgt Cook 1980 08 14   SFC Edwards 1980 08 14    DA FORM 1962  FEB 57 EDITION OF FEB 57 IS OBSOLETE  USAPA V1 01                Marine  Abbot                               Figure 052 260 1235 2  Completed Sample of DA Form 1962       STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    ERREUR    TRAVERSE COMPUTATION ON THE UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR GRID    FROM STATION    TOTAL ANGULAR CLOSURE           NR OF ANGLE STATIONS    ANY WHERE       5  F                amp           309 999  ob        inn                EELE         3763 327       y 
2.                                    lt         lt      mn       m  D                                v          COMPUTED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD        7    DA FORM 1932  FEB 1957 USAPA V1 00    Figure 052 260 2470 1  Sample of DA Form 1932 With Block Numbers    3  148    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps                PROJECT  412 104 E 100 LTPE  LOCATION   Fort Belvoir  VA  SPHEROID  WGS 84    Sample problem   o   31 41 16 641 74 18 23 672  496 8   o 3507696 088  A    DO A198          a 3353 198  P    0 06231653   an    0 00388335  0 00024200         U T M  GRID COORDINATES FROM GEOGRAPHIC COORDINATES  For use of this form  see      3 34 331  the prponent agency is TRADOC    ORGANIZATION  AGS  DMS    CENTRAL MERIDIAN                       UNIT FE  Meter _   500 000 m                   Station              gt    gt   SJS        3         dE         0 0011           LN               av  263213 604 0 24963280       46 518 0 01555625         mem 0 00096941        3507905056        65707473  3507905 056      434292 527                  Station                     an    3122                    e                 gt     o  E  S    v                     DATE                          COMPUTED BY  SSG Zambrano    DA FORM 1932  FEB 1957 USAPA V1 00    Figure 052 260 2470 2  Completed Sample of DA Form 1932         149    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  a  Enter the project name  location name  and organization in blocks 1a   b  List the station name and geographic coordinates in 
3.                        INSTRUMENT STATION ELEV  ECCENTRICITY  Here          1275            REFLECTOR STATION ELEV  ECCENTRICITY PRISM NO   S asm   tene    me    METEOROLOGICAL READINGS DISTANCE   meters        PRESSURE   TEMPERATURE  ALTIMETER         DRY  C                           Q  m  m          a                    z       gt          6 377 804 157                                55  HE          az  eo  9         5         T    UO     Z           z         zig  213   8  5   gt   5       ECCENTRIC CORRECTION    EC        7     s s  eo  peers Dec me  REMARKS      ee                                      from the            Calibration  Use only d comp ang manually   gt  I the Offset Cormecbon  2  computed eternaty n the astrument  Then  UO     T     Toward Eccentricity must e ADDED      Away                 must be SUBTRACTED        COMPUTED BY DATE CHECKED BY  SSG Falcon TOT ec ERES eae         NIMA Form 8900 2 JUN 97                        p                    Figure 052 260 1236 2  Completed Sample of NIMA Form 8900 2    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    2  Compute and record the instrument and the reflector elevations   a  Compute the instrument elevation by adding the elevation of the instrument station with the  height of instrument  HI  and record it in block 2a   b  Compute the reflector elevation by adding the elevation of the reflector station with the height of  the reflector and record it in block 2b     3  Compute and record the difference of elevation
4.                    Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References    Required Related  DMS ST 096  DMS ST 097         195    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Process Differential Global Positioning System  DGPS  Data  052 260 2335    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor  given downloaded DGPS data  DGPS session field notes  a  desktop personal computer  PC  with the DGPS processing and adjustment software  DGPS software  user s manuals  Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  096 and 097  DGPS operator s  manual  and instructions on how to process DGPS data     Standards  Process DGPS data using the DGPS processing and adjustment software  Process the data  according to DMS ST 096 and 097 or the DGPS operator s manual     Performance Steps    1   2     Enter the DGPS processing program     Check the data      Select the project      Select  LOAD       Select  FROM DAT FILE       Select the individual files you wish to check or the  ADD ALL  option     Select  LOAD DATA                          Load the baselines     a  Select  PROCESS    b  Select  BASELINES    c  Select  ADD ALL   After the files are added  click  OK        Select the processing options     a  Select  OPTIONS     b  Enable the  NOTIFY ON COMPLETION  option    c  Select  LOG ACTIVITY  and choose the  STANDARD  option   d  Select  TIME DISPLAY  and enable the  LO
5.                  o N O OC  A C PD              Determined if the  C  value was within specifications                                   Determined the correction to the middle wire if the  C  value was not within                specifications                  Performed adjustments to the middle wire  if it was necessary                      Co      Checked the  C  value again  Repeated steps 1 through 12 until the  C  value                was within specifications     14  Initialed the form                 Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly    References    Required Related  DMS FORM 5820 R    3   106    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Perform as a Rodman  052 260 1125    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given a precise or semiprecise level rod  a  rod level  a marlin pin  a hammer  and a designated area to be leveled     Standards  Perform as a rodman during consecutive leveling turns between survey control points   Establish turning points  keep the level rod perpendicular to the ground  pace and maintain a balanced  distance between sightings  and move according to the instrument operator s commands     Performance Steps  1  Plumb the level rod over the survey control point or turning point using a rod level     Pace forward for the next setup     Set up the leveling turn by driving the marlin pin into the g
6.              Repeated performance step 4 for the required number of readings                           A C           Repeated the observations if the accuracy did not meet the specifications  The                readings should not exceed   0 010 meters from the mean     N      Checked DA Form 5819 to ensure that it was complete and correct                   8  Turned off and stored the instrument                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 5819  DMS ST 031  TM 5 6675 332 10    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Measure Horizontal Directions With Theodolites  052 260 1328    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field location  given an operational theodolite set up over a  station  a target set up over a rear station  a target set up over a forward station  a recorder with  Department of the Army  DA  Form 5818  and Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  031     Standards  Measure horizontal directions and two station angles and two explement angles with a  theodolite  The station and explement angles must be within   5 seconds of their mean  Also  the mean  station and explement angles must add up to   5 seconds of 360    The measured horizontal and  explement angles must conform to third order specifications  according to DMS ST 031  Reobserve any  rejected observations     Pe
7.             38IM 338HL    81801007   QQWWAAXA  31v       s  uof LAd  4304093     Kueduio           8     MOL  NOILVZINVOYO       INI dO 1SNI       Figure 052 260 1228 2  Completed Sample of DA Form 5820    3 110    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    00 LA Va  SN     31310580 S  68        40            002 INF    0285 WYO va           1      000   __   3    928           15149                                                                     INI diWO2 puz                                                  _______ wo          861    QO3 30 32v3 gow 30 39Y4                   LNI         3S                           WNS   30   LHOISHOVE  l dvd        SLL I Ss0l 81801002                                   31va      EZI ZYN          sou LAd     ANSWNYLSNI J30H0038 H3ANH3S80                                  POL   SI        AVY ually  NOILVZINYOMO   NOI1V2O1                     13N                             s  Aouabe jueuodoid eui  Lec vpe          995  uuo  siu  jo asn 104   INI  dO    LSNI SNIT3A31 3HIM 33HHL       Figure 052 260 1228 3  Completed Sample of DA Form 5820    8 111    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  NOTE  Figure 052 260 1228 2 is a forward run  and Figure 052 260 1228 3 is a backward run     The name of the project  block 1a      The location of the project  block 1b      The name of the organization doing the project  block 1c      The rank and name of the instrument operator  block 1d      The rank and name of the recorder  block 1e      The type and
8.             sss enne 3 18  Subject Area 2  Automated Integrated Survey Instrument  052 260 1131 Perform Operator Maintenance on Survey                                                                3 30  052 260 1134 Operate the Automated Integrated Surveying Instrument  AISI                              3 32  052 260 1336 Perform a Topographic Survey With an Automated Integrated Surveying  Instrument               lv dl Sei  A ee dae edet da me A eae 3 36  052 260 1337 Perform a Traverse With an Automated Integrated Surveying Instrument   AIS   EE 3 41  052 260 1338 Perform an Intersection With an Automated Integrated Surveying Instrument   AIS D             ee etg Maes am du tee e tee Al aay    dp dee ae uou           3 46          DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION  Approved for public release  distribution is unlimited     This publication supersedes the portions of STP 5 82D14 SM TG  3 May 1985  that cover Skill Levels 1  and 2     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    052 260 1122  052 260 1225  052 260 1226  052 260 1227  052 260 1234  052 260 1235  052 260 1236  052 260 1313  052 260 1314  052 260 1326  052 260 1328  052 260 1329    052 260 1109  052 260 1125  052 260 1228  052 260 1330  052 260 1340    052 260 1401  052 260 1406    052 260 2338  052 260 2340  052 260 2460    052 260 2466    052 260 2470    052 260 2479  052 260 2482  052 260 2491  052 260 2492    052 260 2486    052 260 2487  052 260 2488  052 260 2489  052 260 2490    052 260 2332  052 260 2333    Subject Area 3  Traverse    
9.           sssssssessssseees eene enne nnne nnn nnn 3 173  Compute a Geodetic Traverse                   ssssssssssseseseeeneeen nennen 3 174  Subject Area 4  Level  Perform Operator Maintenance      a Leveling                                                         3 189  Check Level  Dalai deti ot eS ih ef tte dee ier oe ceu 3 192    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Subject Area 5  Differential Global Positioning System  052 260 2334 Download Data From the Differential Global Positioning System  DGPS     HOCOIVO 1     upra ELI o eee ir PG 3 194  052 260 2335 Process Differential Global Positioning System  DGPS  Data                              3 196  052 260 2504 Adjust Differential Global Positioning System  DGPS  Networks                          3 199  APPENDIX A   DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY  DA  FORM 5164 R  HANDS ON  EVALUATION  c ELE A 1  APPENDIX B   DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY  DA  FORM 5165 R  FIELD EXPEDIENT                                                                     1  APPENDIX C   CONVERSION FACTORS  UNITED STATES  US  UNITS AND METRIC                    C 1  IDIOT Glossary 1    Supporting References            cicer ite oer ados crc          Vo one Tl Roa e ua      Ra v               References 1    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    PREFACE    This publication is for skill levels  SLs  1 and 2 soldiers holding military occupational specialty  MOS  82D  and their trainer or first line supervisors  It contains standardized training objectives in the form of task  summaries that may be use
10.        ea          EE    0 5    hz  h 47 5 tan 90   C   k  ABC k in secs     05279    COMPUTED BY DATE                      CHECKED      DATE  YYYYMMDD   amorar 2001C 2 1     DA FORM 1947  1 FEB 57            V1 01    46 3719    58     5506    IEEE ae  ae pS       es is    1  n  i MEET                   fowls            nes aaa  EE i  a           eee  PEN RE  pong            Dg    ___  a    Ls     Esa            Figure 052 260 1335 7  Completed Sample of DA Form 1947    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    a   b          d  e    f     g    h    Fill in the administrative headings in blocks 3a    Enter the name of the station whose elevation is known  station 1  occupied  in block 3b    Enter the name of the station whose elevation is unknown  station 2  observed  in block 3c   Enter the object sighted  for example  target or obstruction light  in block 3d    Enter the mean observed ZD in block 3e    Enter the azimuth of the line to the nearest minute  get this information from DA Form 1938   and enter it in block 3f    Enter the mean latitude of the line to the nearest minute in block 3g  this is obtained by  converting the northings and eastings computed on DA Form 1938 to geographic positions then  taking the mean of the latitudes     Record the weighted mean coefficient of refraction  when not observed use 0 4290  and enter it  in block 3h       Enter the grid distance  S  in block 3i  the grid distance  S  is obtained from DA Form 1938      Determine the mean radius 
11.       6     8  Determine and enter the cumulative sums for all successive BS and FS readings    a  The total of all wire readings  blocks 8a     b  The total of all mean middle wire readings  blocks 8b     c  The total of all sums of intervals  blocks 8c    NOTE  The difference between the BS sum of intervals and the FS sum of intervals  step 8c  must not  exceed 100  a 10 meter stadia distance  at any time  When the difference between the sums of intervals  is 30  a 3 meter stadia distance   it is recommended that corrections be made to the FS by either  lengthening or shortening the FS about one half of the difference between the BS and the FS sum of  intervals     9  Enter the name of the closing benchmark or the temporary benchmark for the section  for example   TBM 1  in block 9   NOTE  If more than one page of notes is required to reach the closing station  the cumulative totals  steps  8a  8b  and 8c  must be carried over to the first line of the new page     10  Perform a page check  A page check is required for each completed page of DA Form 5820 before  transcribing running totals to the next page  It is also required upon completion of a section and is  accomplished in the following manner    a  Divide the final sum of all wire readings  BS and FS  step 8a   by three and compare this  amount to the running total of the mean middle wire sums  step 8b   A difference exceeding 0 1  indicates an error  Check all interim sums for math errors    b  Enter your initials to
12.      Hep          REMARKS    COMPUTED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD   SSG D  Jones  20010522    CHECKEDBY DATE  YYYYMMDD              DA FORM 5819  JUN 2001          ___ of  USAPA V1 00       Figure 052 260 2460 2  Completed Sample of DA Form 5819    3   137    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Select an area that is level or of  constant slope for a distance of about 700 meters  Mark 10 stations at the approximate distances  prescribed  no taping is necessary   station 1  0 meters  station 2  50 meters  station 3  100 meters   station 4  150 meters  station 5  200 meters  station 6  250 meters  station 7  300 meters  station 8  400  meters  station 9  500 meters  station 10  600 meters  Obtain the assistance of two instrument operators  who are qualified according to task 051 260 1326 and two recorders who are qualified according to task  051 260 1225  Measure the following distances  0 to 50 meters  0 to 100 meters  0 to 150 meters  0 to  200 meters  0 to 250 meters  0 to 300 meters  50 to 100 meters  100 to 200 meters  150 to 300 meters   200 to 400 meters  250 to 500 meters  and 300 to 600 meters  Reduce the distance to horizontal     Brief Soldier  Tell the soldier that all distances received are horizontal and that it is not
13.      Performed a check on the BS station before leaving it                    Reobserved any bad measurements  if it was necessary                    Checked and or edited the stored data                    Exited Program 11 12                           o N O         A      Moved to the next station and completed the measurements             Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  AISI OPERATOR  S MANUAL DMS ST 648  DMS ST 031    TM 5 6675 332 10    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Subject Area 3  Traverse    Set Up a Target Set  052 260 1122    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given a survey target with accessories  a  survey control point  a tripod  a plumb bob  a 2 meter tape measure  and two intervisible survey stations     Standards  Set up a survey target over a survey station and plumb the target within 2 millimeters of the  center of the station  The target must be visible from the designated observation point  Measure the  height of all well defined points on the target to the nearest 0 001 meter     Performance Steps    1  Set up the survey target  Figure 052 260 1122 1         Figure 052 260 1122 1  T 2 Target set    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps   a  Extend the legs of the tripod equally and open them the same distance from the axis of the   tripod    b  Set the
14.     3  Computed the position closure and adjustment on DA Form 1962                Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1923  DA FORM 1962  DMS ST 031    3   187    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    References  Required Related  SP 241    3   188    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Subject Area 4  Level    Perform Operator Maintenance on a Leveling Instrument  052 260 2332    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor  given a level  with all accessories and Technical Manual  TM  5   6675 329 13 amp P   level rods  appropriate cleaning materials  two copies of Department of the Army  DA   Form 2404  two turning pins  two 2 pound hammers  and two rod levels     Standards  Perform operator maintenance on a level according to TM 5 6675 329 13 amp P or the  manufacturer s manual and record deficiencies on DA Form 2404     Performance Steps    1  Inspect the instrument for damage or wear   a  Visually inspect the instrument for broken or missing parts   b  Check for cracked or scratched lenses     2  Clean the level with a dry  lint free cloth   a  Take the instrument indoors after use in moist weather   b  Open the transport case and remove the instrument   c  Allow the instrument to dry naturally   d  Allow condensation on the lenses to evaporate naturally     3  Clean all glass surfaces with lens tissue and solution   a
15.     Checked the data                    Loaded the baselines                    Selected the processing options                    Set up the processing session                    Edited the occupations                    Entered the precise station coordinates                    Selected the baseline sets and set the reference coordinates                     Processed the baselines                                N O    A C PD              Saved the processing session                   3   197    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Measures GO NOGO    11  Checked the results                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DGPS OPERATOR S MANUAL  DMS ST 096  DMS ST 097    3   198    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Adjust Differential Global Positioning System  DGPS  Networks  052 260 2504    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor  given processed DGPS data  a desktop personal computer  PC   with the DGPS processing and adjustment software  DGPS software user s manual  Defense Mapping  School  DMS  Special Text  ST  096 and 097  DGPS operator s manual  and instructions on how to  adjust a DGPS network     Standards  Adjust a DGPS network using the DGPS processing and adjustment software  Adjust the  data according to DMS ST 096 and 097 or the DGPS operator s manual     Performance Steps    1  Enter the adj
16.     ORGANIZATION  DMS  LONE NM  STATION ELLIPSOID 2 STATION ELLIPSOID   ZONE  BHTW 36   43  WGS84  4070658 696   279412 593         220587 407     IX H         LOCATION  Fort Belvoir  VA    ELLIPSOID       CENTRAL MERIDIAN                4070658 696                    36   46  54 205        1900 435         0 04865880       0 00236768       00   01 32 412   __92412     36   45  21 793                83   28  15 906                    N  N in NORTHERN HEMISPHERE  N    10  000 000 000   N in SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE                     E FEorFE E q   0000001   E    Ap       VII  q           q4          45           Ag        IX  q   x  43    Es  qf      CM   2                       COMPUTED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD    CHECKED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD   SSG Zambrano 20010818    DA FORM 1933  JUL 2001 EDITION OF FEB 1957 IS OBSOLETE  USAPA V1 00       Figure 052 260 2466 2  Completed Sample of DA form 1933    8 141    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  a  Enter the project name  location name  and organization in blocks 1a   b  List the station name and UTM grid coordinates in blocks 1b   c  Use TM 8358 1 to obtain the following information and record it on DA Form 1933     1  Central meridian  CM   block 1c 1   The longitudes that are listed across the top and  bottom of the chart are for zone boundaries  The CM of the zone is the mean of the zone  boundaries    NOTE  The CM must be entered with the appropriate sign     2  Ellipsoid  block 1c 2   The plotted point will be in one of the border
17.    2    Figure 052 260 1235 3  Completed Sample of DA Form 1940       DA 1940    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps   NOTE  For SSs only  after completing step 1  skip steps 2 through 8 and go to step 9      The project name  block 1a       The project location  block 1b       The organization  block 1c       The  from station   starting station   block 1d       The  to station   ending station   block 1e       The number of angle stations  number of observed field angles   block 1f       The grid zone number  block 19       The traverse or SS station name  enter on both sides of DA Form 1940   blocks 1h       The observed angles  corrected mean station angles   block 1i       The corrected field distances  block 1j       The starting and ending projected geodetic azimuths  T   block 1k       The mean elevation  block 11       The starting and ending UTM grid coordinates for a traverse or the UTM grid coordinates of the  occupied station for SSs  blocks 1m     NOTE  The starting and ending projected T may be obtained from the UTM coordinates by computing the   grid azimuth  t  and  t  T  on DA Form 1934                                     2  Compute the sum of angles by adding all the observed angles to the starting back azimuth  Leave  the value in decimal degrees and record it to six decimal places in block 2  round the answer      3  Compute the ending azimuth by subtracting 180   from the sum of the angles until you are as close  as possible to the known ending azimut
18.    3  The station name  block 3a 3       4  The locality designation  for example  state  province  county  or country   block      4       5  The stamping on the mark  inscription on the disk   block 3a 5       6  The agency that established the mark  block 3a 6       7  The coordinates or the station  either the UTM or the geodetic   blocks 3a 7      Write a station description that includes the following  block 3b      1  A recovery note  The recovery note should be as follows  recovered as described  no  change in the sketch and description  recovered  the station was recovered but the  description required some changes  not recovered  no evidence of the station was found   disturbed  the station was found but there was evidence that the station had been  displaced  destroyed  evidence that the station existed but was unable to be reset within 1  centimeter  reset  the station was found and reset to within 1 centimeter of the original  position     2  The general location  Provide the general vicinity information in relation to major  landmarks  cities  and cultural or man made features  Use the following phrase  The  station is located          3  A route description  Describe the route to follow to find the station that starts from a  prominent point  such as an intersection or prominent landmark  for example  from town  hall  proceed 2 4 miles south on Main Street to the intersection of Main Street and Elm  Road   Use tenths of miles or kilometers in the description  U
19.    8  Compute the adjusted angles by algebraically adding the correction per angle to the observed angle   Record it to one decimal place in block 8     9  Compute the azimuth of each traverse section or SS by adding the first adjusted angle to the starting  back azimuth  If this azimuth is over 360    subtract 360    This is the azimuth to the forward station  or SS station  Record it in block 9  The azimuth of all lines must always be stated in the direction in  which the SS or traverse is being computed    NOTE  For an SS  stop here and skip steps 10 through 13 and go to step 14     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps   a  Convert the forward azimuth of the line to a back azimuth by either adding or subtracting 180    from the forward azimuth  The forward azimuth to the next station is then computed by adding  the back azimuth from the previous line to the adjusted angle of the next station  If the new  forward azimuth to the station is greater than 360    subtract 360       b  Repeat this procedure until the final station obtains a perfect check  The computed closing  azimuth must agree exactly with the known closing azimuth  If not  a math error has been  made and must be corrected    NOTE  It is very important that particular attention be given to the direction of azimuth  An error of 180    may go undetected and two errors of 180  will cancel out  providing a final azimuth check   This will result  in some sections being reversed in direction  Always refer to the sk
20.    Computed the HC and the error       Computed and recorded the corrections to the mean station and explement    angles     Applied the corrections to determine the corrected station angle and explement  angles     Signed and dated the form     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    NO GO    Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any    step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1916  DMS ST 031    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Measure Distances With Electronic Distance Measuring Equipment  EDME   052 260 1326    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given an infrared EDME  a tripod  a 2   meter tape measure  a thermometer  a barometer  two intervisible survey stations  an EDME target set   set up and ready   Technical Manual  TM  5 6675 332 10  Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text   ST  031  and a recorder with Department of the Army  DA  Form 5819     Standards  Measure distances with the EDME to third order specifications according to DMS ST 031     Performance Steps    1  Set up and plumb the EDME over the survey station    a  Open the tripod and  with the cover on  attach the plumb bob    b  Place the tripod over the survey control station and ensure that it is plumb over the mark   Embed the tripod legs firmly in the ground    c  Adjust the legs until the tripod head is horizontal  Ensure that the plumb bob is still plumb over  
21.    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Topographic Surveyor  Soldier s Manual and  Trainer   s Guide MOS 82D  Skill Levels 1 2    DISTRIBUTION RESTRICTION  Approved for public release  distribution  is unlimited     HEADQUARTERS       DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY      STP 5 82D12 SM TG     SOLDIER TRAINING HEADQUARTERS  PUBLICATION DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY  No  5 82D12 SM TG Washington  DC  27 August 2001    Topographic Surveyor Soldier s Manual and Trainer s Guide  MOS 82D Skill Levels 1 2    TABLE OF CONTENTS    PAGE  Table of             oO so ret te ea ee ee eas i  PREFAGE                   E A E               T E              iv  Chapter T                                  cece                                                     1 1  Chapter 2  Training Guide      eee a re e raaa rae ea aena aa ape ehori dae aae nam tanaan haa eieiaeo diede naie 2 1  Chapter 3  MOS Skill Level Tasks            cccssecceeseeeeeeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeeeescaeeeneeeeeseeeeseaesenueeeneeeeseesesaeeeneeeeneeaeas 3 1  Skill Level 1  Subject Area 1  General  052 260 1116 Emplace a Permanent Survey Control                                                                        3 1  052 260 1213 Sketch and Describe the Location of a Survey Control Station                                 3 4  052 260 1323 Recover Survey Control Stations                      essen 3 10  052 260 1333 Perform a Topographic Survey by the Stadia Transit                                             3 16  052 260 1335 Compute an Intersection            
22.    VAL  Vertical angle  VII    Vill    Glossary   8    Angle measured from the rear station to the forward station in a  traverse     standard  sexually transmitted disease  station number   soldier s training publication  sustainment   satellite vehicle    trained  slab thickness  deck thickness  crown thickness  geodetic  azimuth  grid azimuth  slope distance  telescope above station  time    tangent   telescope   trainer s guide   technical manual   training   table s  of organization and equipment   United States Army Training and Doctrine Command  truck  tracking   uncorrected distance  mean uncorrected slope distance  United States   US Army Publications  amp  Printing Command   United States Army Sergeants Major Academy   unit structure diagram  user defined sequence  universal transverse Mercator   nerve agent  volt  Table value V   volt ampere  Virginia  vertical angle   value   See zenith distance    Table value 7    Table value 8    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    WK weekly   WX weather   X all weather  none  by  Table value 10  XII Table value 12   XIII Table value 13   XMEM external memory   YYY MMDD year  month  and date   Z zulu time  Greenwich Mean Time   offset correction  ZD zenith distance   ZEN zenith   Section Il   Terms   degree   Abstract    A summary of the results of recorded field notes used for computational purposes     Allowable error  The amount of error that can be introduced in a survey measurement of distance  elevation  or position  and still meet the p
23.   19  Computed the AE for position closure                 20  Computed the KN and the KE                 21  Computed the corrections to the dNs and the dEs                 22  Computed the SS or final adjusted grid coordinates                 23  Signed and dated the form                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1940 DA FORM 1934  DA FORM 1962  DMS ST 031    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Compute Distances  052 260 1236    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a secure field environment  given National Imagery Mapping  Agency  NIMA  Form 8900 2 with the corrected slope distance  T   the azimuth of line  the mean latitude   h   any eccentric values  and the elevations of the instrument and reflector stations  a scientific  calculator  a desktop personal computer  PC  with the NIMA Tables Program  for geodetic distances  only   and the project directive     Standards  Compute distances to ensure that all readings are summed and meaned and agree within    10 millimeters from the mean  Reject and reobserve any reading that exceeded the   10 millimeters   Compute the difference in elevation  d  to the same number of decimal places as the given elevations   Compute the horizontal distance  H  to three decimal places  Compute the eccentric correction  EC  to  three decimal places  if ne
24.   2             502                uis 10      uis         soo          0   7100 4   000014         0502          D UIS S X       S09       NOILVLNdWOD NOILISOd    Figure 052 260 2490 1  Sample of DA Form 1923 With Block Numbers    3 175    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps            TABULATION OF GEODETIC DATA  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC   ORGANIZATION  Fixed Azimuth to  Fixed Latitude Fixed Longitude Reference Mark Reference Mark  32 42  06 397   114 00    44 140  253 56  41 07     32 50  38 641   113 21  38 157  77 40  44 33       Field   Geodetic Distribution       LOCATION  Anywhere       ese   D  pl  E  tea ee    aa              ae           Sa  NEG  C  srs   o       peed  pr ces ea  i   EREMO                                                   VENE SET  imple          Aa                                                     o            gt            MM   Lg MESS  peel       ee gee  p e  p  SEHEN   poe              E cl            cp    Lanai          TABULATED BY DATE                      CHECKED BY DATE  YYYYMMOD   SSG Zambrano 2001 05 25    1962  FEB 57 EDITION OF FEB 57 IS OBSOLETE  USAPA V1 01    Figure 052 260 2490 2  Completed Sample of DA Form 1962    3 176    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    001A vavsn    poui4apun 40 addi pjoq avay ut 10u aut  20 q  Aavay IY  Jopun SUL  NWO 512   0  0008             104 74 LON          91       xoiddv     v        L66cOps 0    ws 40        uil                  22         1
25.   Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to record level data     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Entered administrative data on DA Form 5820               Entered the wire readings  in millimeters  for the BS and FS observed                   2  3  Determined and entered the stadia intervals                 4      Determined the mean reading by applying the correction to the middle wire                reading          N      C       Determined and entered the sum of intervals                   Computed the cumulative sums                   Repeated steps 2  3  4  5  and 6                     Determined and entered the cumulative sums for all successive BS and FS                  readings     9  Entered the name of the closing benchmark or temporary benchmark for the             section     10  Performed a page check                   11  Computed the differences in elevation and distance between the stations                   12  Performed the backward run by repeating steps 1 through 11 and recording all                observations     13  Computed and recorded the EC and AE for the completed level line                   14  Initialed the form                3 114    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 5820  DMS ST 031    3 115    
26.   The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to compute a grid traverse           55     Performance Measures GO NOGO  NOTE  For a traverse  completed all the steps  For an SS  completed steps 1  9  14   15  22  and 23    1  Entered administrative data on DA Form 1940 and abstracted all information from          DA Form 1962 onto DA Form 1940       Computed the sum of the angles                   Computed the ending azimuth                   Computed the AEC                Computed the AE                Computed the correction per station                   Computed the correction per observed angle and assigned those corrections                   Computed the adjusted angles                   Computed the azimuth of each traverse section or SS                   Computed the SLC                   Computed the MID N and MID E                           o N O      A C PD    oe        po        Computed the scale factor                                       Computed the grid distances                      A      Computed the cosine and sine of the azimuths                                Computed the dNs and the dEs                                Computed      En and the Ee                      N      Computed the LEC                               Computed      RC              STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Measures GO NOGO
27.   The sum of the corrections must equal  the errors of dN and dE with the opposite sign  If  because of rounding errors  the sum does not exactly  equal the error of dN or dE  this difference must be distributed  For uniformity  the largest corrections are  changed by one unit  third decimal place  until the correct sum is obtained     22  Compute the SS or final adjusted traverse grid coordinates  northings and eastings    a  For an SS  algebraically add the dN and dE to the occupied station coordinates for each  observation and proceed to step 23     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps   b  For a traverse  compute the adjusted northing by algebraically adding the dN and the correction  of the dN to the northing of the preceding station  Record the value to three decimal places in  block 22b    c  For a traverse  compute the adjusted easting by algebraically adding the dE and the correction  of the dE to the easting of the preceding station  Record the value to three decimal places in  block 22c    NOTE  Continue this procedure in a like manner for each station  As a math check  apply the last dN  and the last correction to the dN to the northing of the preceding station  The answer must equal the  fixed northing of the closing station  The same is true for the easting     23  Sign and date the form  blocks 23      Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed
28.   To build the table on a 1 minute interval  enter 0 1 0 and press the enter key      Input the southern latitude limit  DMS    NOTE  For the southern limit  deduct 5 minutes from the seed latitude and press the enter key   m  Input the northern latitude limit  DMS  for the table   NOTE  For the northern limit  add 5 minutes from the seed latitude and press the enter key   n  Select the table or value to construct  Round the final answer to three decimal places and  record it in block 6n   NOTE  Select  OPTION 5  LATITUDE FROM GRID COORDINATES   and press the enter key  Look at  the values in column   and find the value that is as close to but less than the N   The latitude associated  with this value becomes the degrees and minutes of the latitude  To find the seconds  subtract the  tabular value   from the N  and divide by the difference  1  for the latitude associated   This is the value  you will use to generate the tabular values     7  Generate tabular values VII        06  IX  X  and E5 using the NIMA Tables Program for the  appropriate ellipsoid    a  Enter 99 and press the enter key    b  Select  OPTION 5  CHANGE COMPUTATION MODE   from the  PROGRAM CONTROL   CODE MENU  and press the enter key    c  Select  OPTION 1  INDIVIDUAL POINT   and press the enter key    d  Enter the latitude that you figured when prompted to  INPUT LATITUDE OF POINT  and press   the enter key    e  Select the table or value to construct the screen  Select  OPTION 5  LATITUDE FROM GRID  COORD
29.   Use caution when removing dust or sand from lenses   b  Use an antistatic lens paper  cotton wad  or lens brush  if possible       Never use a coarse or dirty cloth or hard paper     4  Inspect the level and controls for damage and proper function   a  Inspect the horizontal traversing and slow motion mechanism for proper operation   b  Inspect the reticle for smooth operation   c  Inspect the telescope focusing mechanism for smooth operation   d  Rotate the three leveling foot screws and inspect for rough travel and instability     5  Clean the level accessories and the hand levels  turning pins  and hammers with mild detergent and  warm water  Wipe them dry immediately     6  Record uncorrectable faults on DA Form 2404  see Figure 052 260 2332 1           189    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    EQUIPMENT INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE WORKSHEET  For wae ot this form  see OA        735 750 ang 738 751  the propeneet agency is OCSLOG  T ORGANIZATIO 2  NOMENCLATURE ANO MODE  70th Eng Co  29th Eng Bn Ft  Shafter  HI Wild Heerbrugg Na2 80 Level    REGISTRATION SERIALINSN isnt dno BUNOS 5  DATE 6  TYPE INSPECTION  SN 02183 8  7     APPLICABLE REFERENCE                            TM NUMBER   TM 5 6675 329 13 amp P  COLUMN      Enter TM item number   COLUMN b   Enter the applicable condition status symbol    COLUMN c   Enter deficiencies and shortcomings             COLUMN d   Show corrective action for deficiency or  shortcoming listed in Column c     COLUMN c   Individual 
30.   d  in block 3  Subtract the instrument elevation from  the reflector elevation and record the absolute value to the same number of decimal places as the  given elevations     4  Compute and record the horizontal distance  H  in block 4  The horizontal distance  H  is equal to  the square root of the following value     T squared   d squared    where    T   Corrected slope distance   d   Difference of elevation   NOTE  If only the horizontal distance  H  is required  the computation is complete  Proceed to step 10     5  Compute and record the mean elevation  h  in block 5  Add the elevation of the instrument with the  elevation of the reflector and divide by two     6  Determine the mean radius of curvature  rho   Use the NIMA Tables Program and input the  following      Enter the tables program      Enter any letter      Select the  LONG PROMPTS  option      Enter a station name      Select an ellipsoid      Enter the mean latitude of the station      Select the  RADIUS OF CURVATURE   Table XX       Record the mean rho on NIMA Form 8900 2 in block 6      Exit the tables program          JQ                7  Determine and record the EC in block 7  if necessary  Algebraically add the eccentricity at the  instrument station with the eccentricity at the reflector station  The toward eccentricity is a positive  value and the away eccentricity is a negative value     8  Compute the sea level reduction factor  C   Use the following formula  Record it to three decimal  places with
31.   wwf ee         _ 5                         e           n  xum                           7                   1 7 ORE DM    eysery 2uSLIAUTE Hog  NOILY901   OOQYYL s               juauodosd ayy   Lee ve c IN 39S           SIY  JO esn 204       Figure 052 260 1335 5  Completed Sample of DA Form 1938    3 24    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    Q                                a         u   V     W       Fill in the administrative headings in blocks 2a      Enter the grid azimuth for side 2 3 in block 2b  get this information from DA Form 1962       Enter the grid azimuth for side 3 2 in block 2c  get this information from DA Form 1962       Enter the angles at stations 2 and 3  the station names opposite their appropriate numbers  and    the coordinates for stations 2 and 3 in blocks 2d       Enter the grid distance for side 1 2 in block 2e  get this information from DA Form 1920      Enter the grid distance for side 1 3 in block 2f  get this information from DA Form 1920      Compute the grid azimuth for side 2 1 by adding angle  2 to the azimuth for side 2 3  If the sum    exceeds 360    subtract 360    Enter this amount in block 2g       Determine the sine of the azimuth for side 2 1 and enter it in block 2h     Compute the difference in easting  dE  by multiplying the sine of the azimuth for side 2 1 by the    grid distance for side 2 1 and enter it in block 2i       Compute E1 by adding the dE to 22 and enter it in block 2j     Determine the cosine of the azimuth 
32.  260 1336    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given a complete AISI set  a tripod  a  plumb bob  a 2 meter tape measure  coordinates for the occupied and backsight  BS  stations  personnel  to operate the targets  a recorder  a recording sheet  procedures for collecting data by means of a  topographic survey with an AISI  Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  648  and the AISI  operator s manual     Standards  Perform a topographic survey with an AISI  Collect topographic survey data for three survey  targets   prism poles   Perform observations according to the guidelines and procedures set forth in the  AISI operator s manual  Observations must meet the specifications contained in the unit s standing  operating procedure  SOP  or the recommended procedures in DMS ST 648     Performance Steps    1  Perform the indoor procedure   a  Disable the dual axis compensator    1  Place the instrument on the desk and press the power  PWR  button    2  Press F22 and set the compensator to 0    3  Press the enter  ENT  button   b  Set the units of measure  time  and date    1  Press the menu  MNU  button and enter 17    2  Press the YES button to accept or the NO button to change the units at the display  prompts   Press the MNU button and enter 15   Press 1 to set the date   Enter the correct date in the year  month  and day  YYY MMDD  format   Press the ENT button to accept the change   Enter the correct time in the hour  minutes  and seconds  HH 
33.  3 280840 SUM    up   1527 308 MEAN UNCORRECTED  SLOPE DISTANCE  UD     H                    oly ala ew                 5 ZERO CORRECTION     2        7636 540  REFRACTIVE INDEX  PRODUCT CORRECTION  RC     CORRECTED SLOPE  DISTANCE  1       UNCORRECTED                       HORIZON DISTANCE  H                            CORRECTION   EC                Obtained from  nstrument Calibration    Toward Eccentricity must be ADDED     Away Eccentricity must be SUBTRACTED  HORIZON DISTANCE   Hm     Hip       REMARKS    Sample    COMPUTED BY   DATE  YYYYMMDD   SSG Zambrano    20010818             CHECKEDBY    gt  DATE  YYYYMMDD   SFC Gan  20010818  DA FORM 5819  JUN 2001 Pags __ of             V1 00    Figure 052 260 1225 2  Completed Sample of DA Form 5819    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    2  Record the height of instrument  HI  above the station  the height of reflector above the station  and  the eccentricities at the instrument and reflector stations in blocks 2     3  Read and record meteorological data    a  The barometric pressure at the instrument station  block 3a     b  The temperature at the instrument station  block 3b     c  The barometric pressure at the reflector station  block 3c     d  The temperature at the reflector station  block 3d     e  The sum and mean of the barometric pressures  blocks 3e   To determine the sum  add the  barometric pressure at the instrument station with the barometric pressure at the reflector  station and record it to one decimal 
34.  AISI     Perform a Topographic Survey With an  Automated Integrated Surveying Instrument   AISI     Perform a Traverse With an Automated  Integrated Surveying Instrument  AISI     Perform an Intersection With an Automated  Integrated Surveying Instrument  AISI     Set Up a Target Set    Record Electronic Distance Measuring   Equipment  EDME  Values    Record Horizontal Directions for Theodolites    Record Vertical Angles  VAs  Zenith Distances   ZDs  for Theodolites    Check Field Notes and Abstracts for Errors  Compute a Grid Traverse or Side Shot  SS     Compute Distances    AIT    AIT    AIT    AIT    AIT    AIT    AIT    AN    QT    QT  QT    QT  QT  QT       STP 5 82D12 SM TG    4  Level    5  Differential  Global  Positioning  System    052 260 1313    052 260 1314    052 260 1326    052 260 1328    052 260 1329    052 260 1109  052 260 1125  052 260 1228    052 260 1330    052 260 1340    052 260 1401    052 260 1406    Abstract Vertical Angles  VAs  Zenith Distances AIT QT 1   ZDs    Abstract Horizontal Angles  HAs  AIT QT 1  Measure Distances With Electronic Distance  AIT QT 1    Measuring Equipment  EDME     Measure Horizontal Directions With Theodolites AIT QT 1    Measure Vertical Angles  VAs  Zenith AIT QT 1  Distances  ZDs  With Theodolites       Determine the Level Error       Perform as a Rodman  Record Level Data    Measure the Difference in Elevation With a  Level    Compute a Differential Level Line    Collect Data With Differential Global   Positioning Sy
35.  Aim the instrument at the reference object and press the A M button     NOTE  If not entering the area file and entering the coordinates manually  leave the space blank   e  Execute the Topographic Survey Program      1  Press the PRG button  enter 1  and press the ENT button  starts Program 1           Select the memory device to be used      Enter the project number      Enter the name of the operator      Press the REG button to store admin data      Enter the occupied STN       Enter the P CODE and press the ENT button      Enter the instrument height  IH       Enter the BS STN       Enter the BS station P CODE and press the ENT button     NOTE  Do not change the HA REF if you ran Program 20 and want to measure northings  N  and  eastings  E  in the field  Just press the ENT button and go to the next step      12  Enter 0 0030 when the AISI prompts for the HA REF _ setting  Aim the instrument at the  BS before pushing the ENT button  The HA for the first BS must be recorded on the  recording sheet     NOTE  The AISI is already referenced to the project coordinates if Program 20 was run      13  Enter the PNO for the first topographic shot when the instrument displays PNO _     NOTE  The first shot should be on the BS station  Remember that PNOs can only be used once in each    project      14  Enter the P CODE     15  Enter the TH     16  Ensure that the instrument is in the STD mode  The letters STD will appear on the upper  left hand of the AISI screen  If the instrume
36.  DGPS  Equipment    3 123    Collect Site Information for Differential Global Positioning System  DGPS   PIANNING        3 127    Skill Level 2  Subject Area 1  General    Perform Operator Maintenance on Theodolites                                                     3 129  Supervise Operator Maintenance of Survey                                                              3 132  Compute the Instrument Constant for Electronic Distance Measuring                    EA 3 134  Convert Universal Transverse Mercator  UTM  Grid Coordinates to Geodetic  GOOIdil1al8S    reci iir edat Fetish a cte ada e Ree E Fea E ae             TA 3 139  Convert Geodetic Coordinates to Universal Transverse Mercator  UTM  Grid  Gootdif1al8S 2  rsen ate                          3 147  Compute the Convergence                                                    nnns trenes 3 153  Compute Datum Transformations                    sesssssssesseeeeeee nennen 3 158  Check Intersection Computations                     sssssssssseseseeeenee nennen 3 160  Establish a Declination Station                            sese 3 164  Subject Area 2  Automated Integrated Survey Instrument  Postprocess Automated Integrated Surveying Instrument  AISI  Data                 3 166  Subject Area 3  Traverse  Check Horizontal                                                                        3 169  Check Vertical Angle  VA  Zenith Distance  ZD  Field                                          3 171  Check Distance Data        
37.  Follow the access road around the perimeter of the airfield for 0 9 mile to the station site     The station is a Type 70 monument protruding 20 centimeters above the ground and is located atop  a berm     The station is located 75 1 meters at an azimuth of 160   from Building 6680  82 3 meters from the  hot fuel point and 67 meters from the fuel point sign     Horizontal position was established by third order class   traverse     Elevation was established by third order leveling procedures     Building 6680       DA FORM 1959  OCT 64 REPLACES DA FORMS 1959 DESCRIPTION OR RECOVERY OF HORIZONTAL CONTROL STATION    AND 1960  1 FEB 57  WHICH For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent USAPA V1 00  ARE OBSOLETE  agency is TRADOC  P S    Figure 052 260 1213 2  Completed Sample of DA Form 1959    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps   NOTE  DA Form 1958 is used when performing a benchmark recovery      The country  block 1a       The type of mark  for example  a bronze disk   block 1b       The station name  block 1c       The locality designation  for example  state  province  county  or country   block 1d       The stamping on the mark  inscription on the disk   block 1e       The agency that established the mark  block 1f       The coordinates or the station  if provided  either the universal transverse Mercator  UTM  or  the geodetic   blocks 19                        2  Describe the general location of the station  block 2   Provide the general vicinity informatio
38.  MORE   prompt     Press the NO button at the  END OF TRAVERSE   prompt     Move to the next point     Repeat steps 2 through 6 for additional traverse points     7  Make observations to close the traverse   NOTE  Perform this routine on the last set of BS and FS pairs at the last station  This routine will end the  traverse  so ensure that all measurements are completed before closing the traverse  This routine is not  necessary if at the  END OF TRAVERSE   prompt the user presses the YES button     a             Make a two face pointing at the BS and press the A M button to measure the distance again  if  required    1  Press the REG button and then the YES button at the  MORE   prompt  The display will  appear as follows     Display  STD         16 12   1   FORESIGHT   2   BACKSIGHT   3   OTHER   Enter 3 to select  OTHER   The display will appear as follows     T    Display  STD         16 13   1   BENCHMARK   2   CLOSE   3   SIDE SHOT   Enter 2 to select  CLOSE   The display will appear as follows           Display  STD          16 14  1   EXTERNAL  CE    2   INTERNAL  CI    3   OTHER      Select one of the following     1   FOR CLOSE EXTERNAL TRAVERSE  2   FOR CLOSE INTERNAL TRAVERSE  3   FOR OTHER  POINT TO POINT       Enter the PNO  P CODE  and TH     Make    two face pointing at the closing point and press the A M button     Press the REG button when the measurement of the distance is complete     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that 
39.  ORGANIZATION STATION  1 1 1   DATE  YVYYMMDD  _ INST   TYPE   NO      1  POSITION  NO     COMPUTED BY DATE  vvvvMMDD    CHECKED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD   13 13    DA FORM 1916  FEB 57 USAPA V1 01                           STATIONS OBSERVED                        Figure 052 260 131 4 1  Sample of DA Form 1916 With Block Numbers    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    ABSTRACT OF HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONS  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC   LOCATION ORGANIZATION STATION  Missouri 99th Engr Det  Survey  Lake  USC amp GS  1932    DATE  YYYYMMDD  INST   TYPE           POSITION  NO                               2001 05 22 Wild T 2  28234       STATIONS OBSERVED    ein    o          EI    Explemen   tary Angle        oo                      Mean  Station    Explemen   tary    Closure       38  37  38  38  38  38  38  38  38  37  38       W       _  A    13    1   8   3   4   0   od   2        2   9   2   Corrected  047 46        COMPUTED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD    CHECKED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD   SPC Jones SSG J  Zambrano  2001 05 22 2001 05 22    DA FORM 1916  FEB 57            V1 01                   Figure 052 260 1314 2  Completed Sample of DA Form 1916    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    2  Record the observed data   a  Record the name of the initial station in block 2a   b  Record the name of the forward station in block 2b   c  List the degrees and minutes of the reading at the top of each respective column  block 2c    d  Record the seconds for
40.  Sign and date the form in blocks 9     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to compute a differential  level line     Performance Measures    1     Checked all field notes for omissions and errors  Corrected any errors that were  found       Entered all administrative and known data on DA form 1942  Notified the    supervisor if errors caused the rejection of the field data       Computed and entered the length of each section to the nearest 0 001 kilometer       Computed and entered the observed elevation for each benchmark to the nearest    0 0001 meter       Computed and entered the EC and AE to the nearest 0 0001 meter       Computed and entered the adjustment correction per kilometer to the nearest    0 000001 meter       Computed and entered the correction to each observed elevation to the nearest    0 0001 meter       Computed and entered the adjusted elevation of each benchmark to the nearest    0 001 meter       Signed and dated the form     NO GO    Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     Reference
41.  US Army Reserve  Not to be distributed  EMO only     PIN  079325 000    
42.  V1 00  ARE OBSOLFTE  agency is TRADOC     Figure 052 260 1323 1  Sample of DA Form 1959 With Block Numbers    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps       NOTES ON COMPLETION OF FORM    1  GENERAL  This form may be used in the field or  as  an office form to record and publish positions   descriptions  and related data     2  FIELD USE OF FORM  The information required  should be obtained and recorded AT THE STATION  SITE  The field engineer should fill in only the  information available and applicable to field use  In  general  the geographic and grid positions  azimuths   distances  and elevations should not be filled in at field  level except when the information is required for an  immediate specific purpose     a  ORIGINAL DESCRIPTION OF NEW STATION   The type of mark used for the station  reference marks   and azimuth marks  and a description of each must be  given in the text of the description  If a disk is used  the  identity of the agency whose name is cast in the disk and  all of the letters and numbers stamped on the mark  which identify the organization establishing or setting  the mark should be given  In many areas the use of disks  is not desirable because of their loss  due to vandalism or  superstition  Less conspicuous marks should be used  under these conditions  This requires exact statements of  the character of the marks  Information for all marks as  to the elevation above or below ground and approximate  elevation above or below nearby prominent feat
43.  XVIII value and record it in block 12a   NOTE  Obtain Table 18 values  The XVIII value is extracted from the National Imagery and Mapping  Agency  NIMA  Tables Program or from the tables in DMS ST 045  using the MID N as the argument   Interpolate to compute the XVIII value to six decimal places  round the answer    b  Compute E  by subtracting 500 000 from the MID E and record it to 1 000 meters in block 12b  as an absolute value   c  Compute q by multiplying E  by  000001and record it to six decimal places in block 12c  round  the answer    d  Compute q squared  q2  and q to the fourth power  q4  and record the values to six decimal  places in block 12d  round the answer      STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  e  Compute K using the following formula and record it to six decimals places in block 12e  round  the answer      K   Ko 1    XVIII  q2   0 00003 q4     0 9996 1   0 012318   0 035344   0 00003   0 001249     1 000035    where    Ko   the scale factor at the CM  0 9996   XVIII   the Table 18 value  q   a factor used to convert E  millionths  q2   q squared  q4   q to the fourth power    Compute the scale factor that is used to reduce the grid distance  KH  by multiplying K by the  SLC  Record it to six decimal places in block 12f  round the answer             KH  K  SLC    where     K   scale factor   SLC   sea level coefficient  NOTE  After computing K and KH  record the values in the  Scale Factor x SLC  column on DA Form  1940 beside the appropriate correcte
44.  administrative data on DA Form 5817           2  Made a sketch of the target as shown and as observed                3  Recorded the time  to the nearest minute  that the instrument operator started                observations  if it was necessary     4  Recorded the paired D and R observations as read by the observer for the             required number of repetitions       Computed the corrected ZD             Recorded the time the observer completed the observations  if it was necessary                     Determined the mean VA ZD                N              Gave the form to the instrument operator to check                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 5817 DMS ST 031    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Check Field Notes and Abstracts for Errors  052 260 1234    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given a set of field notes and abstracts  the  project directive  Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  031 and 032  and a scientific  calculator     Standards  Check the field notes and the abstracts recorded during a traverse  intersection  observations  or a level line for errors  Check the field notes and the abstract entries to ensure that they  are complete  neat  and legible  Spot check the field notes and the abstract entries to ensure that they  con
45.  after operations     3  Instructed the operator to clean the equipment and accessories           4  Instructed personnel to perform calibration checks on the equipment           5  Ensured that the operator performed only operator level maintenance                 6  Inspected the operator s maintenance and instrument tests                   7  Instructed the operator to list uncorrectable faults on DA Form 2404                   8  Performed a final inspection on the equipment                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 2404 TM 5 6675 332 10    3   133    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Compute the Instrument Constant for Electronic Distance Measuring Equipment  052 260 2460    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a level and secure field environment  during daylight hours with  no precipitation  given a pair of EDMEs with horizontal distances measured  tripods and accessories   power sources  Department of the Army  DA  Forms 5819 and 1962  scratch paper  a scientific calculator   and a survey party     Standards  Compute a calibration constant which agrees with the precomputed calibration  Verify all  measured distances to ensure that they meet the allowable error     Performance Steps    1  Compute the individual determination for the calibration constant from the following expre
46.  agency is TRADOC   ORGANIZATION    g     o    Ellipsoid  GRS 80    CM    75          a                 Qai                  pc         4285228 863    314226 195  40 379 meters                 Ls        1 N  E    Elev       STP 5 82D12 SM TG       Mean latitude 38  42       M       microwave       Ne                E            i    4285184 870    314411 276  39 987 meters    TPO2 N  E    Elev          AZ          to       2  103  2215 0           Horz z  amp                        ZD to TWR       Observed  TPO 75  25 36 4     1  TPO2 76  26 37 5                     TP01 TPO2 190 238 meters       84 35 09 2   84 30 08 3          1 581  1 556                            TPO1 TWR 6365607 5168  TP02 TWR 6360404 6683       DA FORM 1962  FEB 57    TABULATED BY DATE   YYYYMMDDi  SSG Baker 2001 08 14    CHECKED BY    SFC Whitworth    EDITION CF FEB 57 IS OBSOLETE           DATE  YYYYMMDO   2001 08 14    USAPA V1 01    Figure 052 260 1335 1  Completed Sample of DA Form 1962    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps          101A vdvsn 25 833   026  WHOS         SOpIS                                o 8uv ue pur                            GGWWAAAA           A8                 0 q 8 Z T 8 p  9q  e s sz  v 509 AT aseo e V      q g   5    952     LAT                               pue sopis Z               apis      saue c   ULD   QGAWAAAA  ALWO   A8 aa1ndWoo5 9 509 B 9 q US e   y        II ese  2 uis 2 g uls q y   5       aseD       9uts opis  ongy                                          
47.  at the instrument and reflector stations     4  Entered the required distance measurements as they were made                 5  Determined and recorded the sum and mean slope distance for the readings                   6  Ensured that all entries were legible                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 5819    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Record Horizontal Directions for Theodolites  052 260 1226    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given the National Imagery and Mapping  Agency  NIMA  Form 8240 24  a theodolite with an instrument operator making traverse observations   and the Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  032     Standards  Record horizontal directions for theodolites on NIMA Form 8240 24 to the nearest one tenth  of a millimeter  All records must be neat and legible and all computations must be complete and without  error  The number of positions must be according to project specifications  Traverse station angles must  be two positions within   5 seconds of the mean  Explement angles must be two positions within   5  seconds of the mean  Closure  mean station angle and mean explement angle  must be within   5  seconds of 360       Performance Steps  1  Enter administrative data on NIMA Form 8240 24  Figures 052 260 1226 1 and 052 260 12
48.  be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Show him the starting and ending  survey stations  Tell him to perform a topographic survey with an AISI     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Performed the indoor procedure                 a  Disabled the dual axis compensator   b  Set the units of measure  time  and date   c  Defined the P CODE   d  Created a UDS for a topographic survey     2  Performed the field procedure                 a  Set up and plumbed the instrument    b  Leveled the instrument using the dual axis compensator    c  Executed Program 43 and entered the known stations    d  Executed Program 20 for station establishment    e  Executed the Topographic Survey Program     Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  AISI OPERATOR   S MANUAL TM 5 6675 332 10  DMS ST 648    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Perform a Traverse With an Automated Integrated Surveying Instrument  AISI   052 260 1337    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given a complete AISI set  a tripod  a  plumb bob  a 2 meter tape measure  starting and ending survey stations  personnel to tend the targets   instructions on how to do a traverse with the AISI  Technical Manual  TM  5 6675 332 10 or the AISI  operator s manual  and Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special T
49.  c  Place the AISI in the reverse  Face     position     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  d  Aim the AISI at the first point and press the A M button  The AISI beeps   e  Repeat the observation procedure for steps 3 and 4 for the required number of pointings in the  Face II and   positions until the AISI displays the dH 00 and dV 00 values   NOTE  If the dH is above 05 and the dV is above 10  then repeat steps 3 and 4   f  Press the REG button to store the values  if acceptable   g  Repeat steps 5a through f for additional intersection points     6  Perform a check on the BS station before leaving it   a  Aim the AISI at the BS station and press the A M button   b  Press the REG button to store the value     7  Reobserve any bad measurements  as necessary   NOTE  Reobserve any bad measurements using the same P CODE     8  Check and or edit the stored data   a  Press the menu  MNU  button   b  Enter 2 for the editor   c  Enter 2 for the internal memory  IMEM   displays remaining memory  and press the ENT  button  The display will appear as follows     IMEM JOB 23 09  JOB NO 2    d  Press the button directly under the begin  BEG  button to go to the  BEGINNING OF THE FILE   END TO START   lt    TO PRECEDING DATA  and    gt  TO FOLLOWING DATA   prompt    e  Use the ARROW button to make corrections to the appropriate line  for example  point names  and IHs   Press the ENT button to display the  DEL INS CHG FIND   prompt on the last line   To change the data  press the STD 
50.  difference is greater   the readings must be reobserved     4  Determine the mean reading by applying the correction to the middle wire reading using the 3 7 10  rule   a  Use the scale to determine the correction to the middle wire reading  see Table 052 260 1228     1      Difference in Correction to  Interval Middle Wire  Reading  _      o0         Table 052 260 1228 1  Correction to the Middle Wire Reading    b  Apply the correction to the middle wire reading using the following guidance  If the top interval   step 3a  is larger than the bottom interval  step 3b   then the correction is added to the middle   wire reading  If the bottom interval  step 3b  is larger than the top interval  step 3a   then the  correction is subtracted from the middle wire reading  Enter this value in blocks 4b     5  Determine and enter the sum of intervals  step 3a   3b  in blocks 5     3  112    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    6  Compute the cumulative sums   a  Determine and enter the sum of the three wire readings  step 2a   2b   2c  in blocks 6a   b  Determine and enter the sum of the mean middle wire readings in blocks 6b   c  Determine and enter the sum of intervals in blocks 6c   NOTE  The difference between the BS sum of intervals and the FS sum of intervals  step 5  must not  exceed 100  a 10 meter stadia distance  at any time  If the difference is larger than 100  tell the operator  to balance the sights by relocating the FS rod position     7  Repeat steps 2  3  4  5   
51.  e Standards  The task standards describe how well and to what level you must perform a task  under wartime conditions  Standards are typically described in terms of accuracy  completeness   and speed     e Training and Evaluation  This section may contain all or part of the following  training information  outline  evaluation preparation subsection  and evaluation guide  The training information outline  includes detailed training information  The evaluation preparation subsection indicates necessary  modifications to task performance in order to train and evaluate a task that cannot be trained to  the wartime standard under wartime conditions  It may also include special training and  evaluation preparation instructions to accommodate these modifications and any instruction that  should be given to the soldier before evaluation  The evaluation guide identifies the specific  actions  known as performance measures  that the soldier must do to successfully complete the  task  These actions are listed in a pass fail format for easy evaluation  Each evaluation guide  contains a feedback statement that indicates the requirements for receiving a GO on the  evaluation       References  This section identifies references that provide more detailed and thorough  explanations of task performance requirements than that given in the task summary description     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    1 4  Additionally  some task summaries include safety statements and notes  Safety statements  danger   wa
52.  each position on the line adjacent to their respective reading  block 2d      3  Sum the seconds of the readings in block 3   4  Mean the seconds of the readings in block 4  Divide the sum by the number of positions observed     5  Reject any readings that do not meet the specifications  Redetermine the mean of the seconds   NOTE  Refer to DMS ST 031    a  Put parentheses around and a rejection number by the value that has been rejected  for  example   R1     b  Do not use rejected values in future computations    c  Reobserve those directions that were rejected using the correct circle setting for the rejected  position    d  Record the reobserved directions  on the abstract  on the same line as the rejected value and  repeat steps 3 and 4     6  Enter the eccentric correction  EC  in seconds  if applicable   NOTE  If there is no correction  proceed to step 8     7  Algebraically add the mean station angle and EC  This value is the mean station angle  Record it in  block 7     8  Determine and record the mean explement angle in block 8  If more than two observations are  made  perform steps 2 through 8     9  Compute the horizon closure  HC  and the error by using the following formulas  Record these  values in blocks 9     HC   mean station angle   mean explement angle  Error   HC   360      10  Compute and record the corrections to the mean station and explement angles and record the  values in blocks 10    a  Divide the error by two and then reverse the sign to determine
53.  f  D 0 600    D 0 300       ay 00 200     D 150 300     D 200 400    4  0 250 500     0 300 600       2  Compute the mean calibration constant for 21 through 46     3  Remeasure any rejected distances  Tell the survey party which distances deviate from the mean by  more than 0 02 meters and have them remeasure those     4  Record the calibration constant on DA Form 5819  Figures 052 250 2460 2      3   136    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    FIELD SHEET  INFRARED  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC     ORGANIZATION DATE  YYYYMMDD  APPROXIMATE DISTANCE  Engineer Company 20010522 1 5 km    ZERO CORRECTION  CALIBRATION DATE OBSERVER RECORDER   YYYYMMDD  SPC Doe SGT Smith    20010522      INSTRUMENT STATION          ELEVATION ELEVATION ECCENTRICITY   Here   1 592 m   102 733 INSTRUMENT TOWARD    1     104 325 AWAY     REFLECTOR STATION H T  ELEVATION ELEVATION ECCENTRICITY   There 1 416 m  103 139 REFLECTOR TOWARD   104 555 AWAY     METEOROLOGICAL READINGS             PRESSURE TEMP    Hg   DRY   MM    F          ia    IN        UD x PPM  PRODUCT x 10    UD  Z  RC    1 2   42   SIN ZDx T   H  x 3 280840 SUM    MEAN UNCORRECTED  SLOPE DISTANCE  UD           ZERO CORRECTION   Z     REFRACTIVE INDEX  CORRECTION  RC     CORRECTED SLOPE  DISTANCE  T     UNCORRECTED  HORIZON DISTANCE  H      9 Obtained from Instrument Calibration  Boake oa  EC    Toward Eccentricity must be ADDED     Away Eccentricity must be SUBTRACTED  HORIZON DISTANCE   Hm
54.  from Table 052 260 1109 1 in block  8a    b  Divide the sum in blocks 6c by 10  far rod distance   Use this distance as an argument to  determine the correction  Enter the determined correction from Table 052 260 1109 1 in block  8b    NOTE  The sum of the far rod mean middle wire readings must be corrected for curvature and refraction    c  Algebraically add the sums of blocks 8a and 8b to block 7e and enter this value in block 8c    d  Algebraically add blocks 8c and 7b and enter this amount with the sign in block 8d    NOTE  Block 8d is always negative         9  Compute the C value and truncate to four decimal places  0 0000  with the sign  Enter this amount  in block 9     C   block 8d divided by block 7g   NOTE  If the sum of the far rod mean middle wire readings  block 8c  is larger than the sum of the near   rod mean middle wire readings  block 7b   then the C value is negative     10  Determine if the C value is within specifications   Compare the C value with that allowed for the  instrument  The allowance for instruments used by most units is   0 004  If the C value is within  specifications  no further computations are required      11  Determine the correction to the middle wire if the C value is not within specifications    a  Determine the correction to the middle wire  in millimeter  by multiplying the total rod interval of  the last FS  blocks 6c  by the C value  block 9   Compute to one decimal place and round the  answer  Enter this amount in block 11a    
55.  in a layer that reflects what is in the layer   b  Type or select the  RELAYER  option   c  Type or select the by  NAME  option   d  Enter the name or point code  P CODE  of the object   e  Enter the new layer name and select a color for the layer   f  Repeat steps 6a through e until all new points are relayered and the layer zero is empty   g  Isolate one of the newly created layers  Select  LAYER   then  ISOLATE  and the layer name   h  Use the  MAPP    ID   and  LIST  options to assist you in drafting and or connecting the points   i  Use additional commands from the TerraModel user s manual to edit the points and  connections to reflect the data collected with the AISI   j  Use the  LABEL  option to assign a label to a point    1  Type or select  LABEL     2  Select a point using the mouse    3  Select  D  for the default labels and follow the prompts   k  Repeat steps 6g and h until the remaining layers have been drafted     7  Display the processed data  Select  LAYER    ON    ALL   and  REDRAW  to view the processed  data     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Use data collected during a  topographic survey  according to task 051 260 1336      Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Show him the s
56.  in detail     1 2  This manual should be used along with Soldier Training Publications  STPs  21 1 Soldier s Manual  of Common Tasks  SMCT  and 21 24 SMCT  Army Training and Evaluation Programs  ARTEPs   and  Field Manuals  FMs  25 4  25 5  25 100  and 25 101 to establish effective training plans and programs  that integrate individual and collective tasks     TASK SUMMARIES    1 3  Task summaries contain information necessary to conduct training and evaluate soldiers  proficiency  on tasks critical to the MOS  A separate task summary is provided for each critical task  These task  summaries are  in effect  standardized training objectives that ensure that soldiers do not have to relearn  a task on reassignment to a new unit  The format for the task summaries included in this manual is as  follows       Task Title  The task title identifies the action to be performed       Task Number  A 10 digit number identifies each task or skill  Include this task number  along with  task title  in any correspondence relating to the task         Conditions  The task conditions identify all the equipment  tools  references  job aids  and  supporting personnel that the soldier needs to perform the task in wartime  This section identifies  any environmental conditions that can alter task performance  such as visibility  temperature  and  wind  This section also identifies any specific cues or events  a chemical attack or identification of  a threat vehicle  that trigger task performance    
57.  indicate a page check has been accomplished in block 10b     11  Compute the differences in elevation and distance between the stations    a  Compare the total BS mean middle wire reading and the total FS mean middle wire reading   step 8b   Enter the smaller of the two directly below the larger in block 11a    b  Algebraically add the running total of the BS mean middle wire readings and the running total  of the FS mean middle wire readings  Convert the total sums to meters by dividing by 1 000   Enter the result in meters with the proper sign and appropriately label it as the forward  difference in elevation  FDE  for the forward run or as the backward difference in elevation   BDE  for the backward run  Record this value to four decimal places in block 11b    NOTE  The BS is always positive     and the FS is always negative        c  Add the total sums of intervals of both the BSs and FSs  step 8c   Appropriately label the  amount as the forward distance  F DIST  or as the backward distance  B DIST  and enter it in  block 11c    d  Convert the total sum to kilometers by dividing it by 10 000 and record it to four decimal places  in block 11d    NOTE  This represents the one way distance between the starting and closing stations of the section   The section must be observed in the reverse direction  backward run  to complete the line     12  Perform the backward run by repeating steps 1 through 11 and recording all observations     13  Compute and record the error of clos
58.  intervals in millimeters in blocks 3b  If the difference is greater  than 3  reobserve    Determine and enter the sum of intervals in blocks 3c    Determine and enter the mean middle wire reading in millimeters to one decimal place in block  3d    Determine and enter the sum of the three wire readings  blocks 3a  in millimeters in block 3e     4  Record the foresight  FS   far rod  reading     a   b     C   d     e     Record the rod readings in millimeters in blocks 4a    Determine and enter the stadia intervals in millimeters in blocks 4b  If the difference is greater  than 3  reobserve    Determine and enter the sum of intervals in blocks 4c    Determine and enter the mean middle wire reading in millimeters to one decimal place in block  4d    Determine and enter the sum of the three wire readings in millimeters in block 4e     5  Record the BS  near rod  reading after the level is moved to the second setup     a   b     C   d     Record the rod readings in millimeters in blocks 5a    Determine and enter the stadia intervals in millimeters in blocks 5b  If the difference is greater  than 3  reobserve    Determine and enter the sum of intervals in block 5c    Determine and enter the mean middle wire reading in millimeters to one decimal place in block  5d     6  Record the FS  far rod  reading     a   b                 Record the rod readings in millimeters in blocks         Determine and enter the stadia intervals in millimeters in blocks 6b  If the difference is greater 
59.  is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    References  Required Related  TM 5 6675 332 10    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Record Electronic Distance Measuring Equipment  EDME  Values  052 260 1225    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given an operational EDME  with  accessories   two tripods  an instrument operator  an EDME target  Department of the Army  DA  Form  5819  a 2 meter tape measure  a thermometer  a barometer  and two intervisible survey control stations     Standards  Record EDME values on DA Form 5819  to include all headings  meteorological data  and  designated series of distance measurement values to the nearest millimeter  All entries must be legible  and without error     Performance Steps    1  Record administrative data on DA Form 5819 in blocks 1  Figures 052 260 1225 1 and 052 260   1225 2      STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    FIELD SHEET  INFRARED  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC     PROJECT  1    ORGANIZATION   DATE  YYYYMMDD  APPROXIMATE DISTANCE  1 1 1    ZERO CORRECTION  CALIBRATION DATE  OBSERVER      RECORDER  2  YYYYMMDD  1 1       INSTRUMENT STATION A  ELEVATION ELEVATION   ECCENTRICITY INST  NO   2 2 INSTRUMENT   TOWARD  1  2      AWAY  2    ELEVATION   ELEVATION   ECCENTRICITY  PRISM  NO   2 REFLECTOR   TOWARD  1    AWAY  2  ZD INSTRUMENT TO REFLECTOR    PRESSURE   Hg           CORRECTION FACTOR  PPM   PRODUCT UD x P
60.  latitude for each station and record it in block 3r  The adjusted latitude of  each station is obtained by algebraically adding the difference in latitude and latitude correction  per station to the latitude of the proceeding station    NOTE  As a math check  the sum of the last difference  last correction per station  and latitude of the  proceeding station must equal the fixed latitude of the closing station    s  Compute the corrections and adjusted longitude by repeating steps 3p through r as specified  for latitude    t  Sign and date the form in blocks 3t    NOTE  To obtain a final azimuth and distance between any two stations along the traverse  an inverse  computation must be made since the position adjustment will change the azimuth and distance used in  the computation     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to compute a geodetic  traverse     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Performed the preliminary and final position computations on DA Form 1923 using                the information given on DA Form 1962   NOTE  This computation is for lines under 8 000 meters     2  Computed the azimuth closure and adjustment on DA Form 1962               
61.  manually   h  Enter the station coordinates  Leave the elevation  ELEV    line blank if running a 2 D traverse  by pressing the ENT button     Press the YES or ENT button if the station coordinates were entered correctly and the NO  button to make corrections   j  Press the YES button at the target height   TH  MEASURE   prompt if running a 3 D traverse  or the NO button if running a 2 D traverse   NOTE  Only the TH measure is shown if the coordinates include ELEV   k  Enter the instrument height  IH       Enter the point number  PNO  of the backsight  BS  station   m  Enter the name of the area file in which the BS data was stored or press the ENT button to  enter the data manually   n  Verify the entered coordinates and press the ENT button to accept or the NO button to make  corrections     Aim the instrument at the BS and press the angle measure  A M  button   NOTE  Al the initial BSs must be made in the direct mode   p  Ensure that the horizontal angle reference  HA REF   calculated azimuth between the point  and BS  is displayed                    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  q  Press the register  REG  button  The instrument will beep twice  The display will appear as  follows     Display  STD P27 14 51  1 FORESIGHT   2 BACKSIGHT  3 OTHER    3  Make observation measurements at the initial station   a  Enter 1 for the foresight  FS  measurement  b  Enter the FS PNO   c  Enter the P CODE or the point name twice   d  Enter the TH  The display will appear as fo
62.  meters deep to receive the  shank of a standard survey marker  see Note 2      8  Insert the survey marker and cement it in place with concrete or masonry mortar     4  Establish azimuth and reference marks  as required    d  Emplace metallic rods     1  Emplace any type of metallic rod that can be driven to the point of refusal and will  accommodate some type of survey disk or marker on top  Metallic rods can either be  commercially procured or manufactured from scrap  for example  a used water pipe   Do  not use metallic rods when a subsurface marker is required     2  Use a driving device to drive the rod section to a depth of at least 4 meters or to the point  of refusal  see Note 5      3  Dig a hole around the rod that is a 25 centimeter square or dig a hole that is 25  centimeters in diameter and at least 20 centimeters deep     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps   4  Pour concrete into the hole until it is level with the top of the rod  see Note 1   Make sure  that no more than 2 centimeters of the rod is protruding above ground level    5  Set the prestamped survey marker disk on top of the rod  Make sure that the poured  concrete comes up to the underside of the disk  see Note 2     6  Establish azimuth and reference marks  as required   NOTE 5  Metallic rods come in many sizes and shapes  Procedures listed here are common to all rods   Use special tools such as sledgehammers or gasoline powered impact hammers to drive the rods to the  desired depths     4  Est
63.  name and rank  block 1c       The type and serial number of the instrument used  block 1d       The height of instrument  HI  to the nearest 0 001 meter  block 1e      The date and time of the observations  block 1f       The weather conditions  block 19       Any pertinent information or remarks  block 1h      2   Qo             Number each individual position in sequence  block 2       Name each individual station observed  block 3       List the telescope direction  direct  D  or reverse  R   for each station in block 4      Provide the instrument operator with the circle settings  when necessary      Record the D reading for the rear station in block 6      Record the D reading for the forward station in block 7      Record the R reading for the forward station in block 8      Record the R reading for the rear station in block 9      Compute the mean of seconds of the D and R readings for each station and record it in block 10       Compute and record the angle between the stations in block 11     a  Compute the seconds of the angle by subtracting the mean of the rear station s seconds from  the mean of the forward station s seconds    b  Compute the degrees and minutes of the angle by subtracting the rear station s D reading from  the forward station s D reading     NOTE  This completes the first position of the observation     12     Repeat steps 2 through 11 for the second position     NOTE  Observations for the second position start with the telescope in the R direct
64.  necessary     19  Compute the AE for position closure using the formula found in DMS ST 031 and record this value in  block 19   NOTE  The LEC must be compared to the AE  If the LEC is equal to or less than the AE  the traverse  has meet specifications  If the LEC is greater than the AE  no further computations are necessary     20  Compute the correction factors  correction to northing  KN  and correction to easting  KE   to be  used in adjusting the traverse   a  KN is computed by dividing the En by the length of traverse in meters then changing the sign of  the answer  Record it to seven decimal places with the sign in block 20a  round the answer    b  KE is computed by dividing Ee by the length of traverse in meters then changing the sign of the  answer  Record it to seven decimal places with the sign in block 20b  round the answer    NOTE  The correction factors will always have the opposite sign of the En and the Ee     21  Compute the corrections to the dNs and the dEs    a  The corrections to the dNs are computed by multiplying KN by the grid distance  This is done  for each section of the traverse  Record the value to three decimal places with the sign in block  21a  round the answer     b  The corrections to the dEs are computed by multiplying KE by the grid distance  This is done  for each section of the traverse  Record the value to three decimal places with the sign in block  21b  round the answer     NOTE  After all the corrections are recorded  sum the columns
65.  necessary to  check NIMA Form 8900 2  Give him a safety briefing before starting the test  Show him the work area and  all equipment and personnel  Explain that scoring will be GO or NO GO based on the successful  completion of all performance measures  Tell the soldier to compute the instrument constant for the  EDME     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Computed the individual determination for the calibration constant for the                prescribed distances     2  Computed the mean calibration constant                 3  Remeasured any rejected distances                   4  Recorded the calibration constant on DA Forms 5819 and 1962                Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1962 DMS ST 031  DA FORM 5819 TM 5 6675 332 10    3   138    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Convert Universal Transverse Mercator  UTM  Grid Coordinates to Geodetic Coordinates  052 260 2466    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a secure field environment  given the UTM grid coordinates of  a point  a scientific calculator  a desktop personal computer  PC  with the National Imagery Mapping  Agency  NIMA  Tables Program  instructions on how to convert coordinates  Technical Manual  TM   8358 1  and Department of the Army  DA  Form 1933     Standards  Convert the UTM grid coordinates to geodetic coordinat
66.  of the station  Angles should also be turned to  these items  particularly where no azimuth marks have    been established     b  VIEW  Provide information on height of tower  or stand used in occupying or establishing the station  and information on view from a normal tripod  i e   a  50 foot tower was used at the station  view from a  tripod height is clear to the south and east but is  obstructed by rise in ground  by 50 foot trees  to the  north and west     c  PHOTOGRAPHIC IDENTIFICATION   Provide when possible  two measurements from the  station to natural or cultural features which might be  visible on aerial photography and a description of the  terrain  If photographs are available identify the  station thereon and note estimated accuracy of the  identification     d  NOTES ON RECOVERED STATIONS  A  diligent search should be made for ALL previously  established stations in the vicinity and no station  should be reported as destroyed unless conclusive  evidence of destruction is present  A statement of the  diligence of the search and reason for the nonrecovery  of a previously established mark is required  If the  spot where a station mark was located can be  reproduced by measurement given in the description   the station is not destroyed  The reproduced spot  should be tied in by azimuth and distance and the  estimated accuracy of the reproduced location given   If a new mark is set in the exact location of a  previously established but destroyed mark  the  design
67.  of the survey control station on DA Form 1959  or      DA Form 1958  if it was used      Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1958  DA FORM 1959    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Perform a Topographic Survey by the Stadia Transit Method  052 260 1333    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  during daylight hours with no precipitation   given a theodolite with all accessories  a rodman with a level rod  a recorder with Department of the Army   DA  Form 5818  scratch paper  a plotting scale  a protractor  starting coordinates for two survey stations   and the mission of performing a topographic survey without the benefit of electronic distance measuring  equipment  EDME      Standards  Perform a topographic survey using the stadia transit method  Produce a topographic map  with 0 50 meter contour intervals  accurate to   0 35 meters  in the specified time  All details must be  complete and legibly plotted to within   2 5 millimeters at map scale for the correct relationship     Performance Steps  1  Set up  plumb  and level the theodolite over a survey station   2  Determine the height of instrument  HI  above the station     3  Orient the instrument   a  Locate and focus on the target station   b  Enter the azimuth from the occupied station to the target station as the initi
68.  on  attach the plumb bob    b  Place the tripod over the survey control station and ensure that it is plumb over the survey  mark  Imbed the tripod legs firmly in the ground    c  Adjust the tripod legs until the tripod head is horizontal  Ensure that the plumb bob is still  plumb over the survey mark  If it is not  repeat steps 1a through c    d  Remove the tripod cover and attach the AISI to the tripod    e  Move the AISI on the head of the tripod to bring the plumb bob directly over the survey mark   The base of the AISI will not overhang the tripod head  Firmly tighten the AISI to the tripod    f  Ensure that the internal battery is fully charged and attached to the AISI  If it is not attached to  the AISI  attach it under the eyepiece    g  Level the tribrach s bull s eye bubble using the tribrach s foot screws     2  Level the instrument using the dual axis compensator    a  Remove the lens cover and eyepiece cover    b  Place the face of the instrument parallel to the two foot screws    c  Press the power  PWR  button on the lower left corner of the AISI  The instrument will  automatically go to the  coarse level  mode   If a message to continue appears  answer NO by  pressing the NO button     d  Level both bubbles by using the left thumb rule to adjust the front two foot screws for the lower  bubble and the rear foot screw for the upper bubble  Rotate the instrument 180      e  Press the angle measure  A M  button on the rear of the instrument  The instrument will b
69.  read the direction to              the nearest second             Observed and read the direction to the initial station to the nearest second                   10  Used the proper plate settings for station angle observations and repeated the         sequence of observations      performance steps 6 through 9 until the required  number of acceptable positions had been observed     11  Used the proper initial increment settings for explement angle observations and                repeated the sequence of observations in steps 3 through 10 until the number of  acceptable positions required for the explement angle had been observed     12  Reobserved any positions that were not within specifications                   13  Checked DA Form 5818 for errors and ensured that the horizontal directions were                    within specifications     Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    References  Required Related  DA FORM 5818 TM 5 6675 332 10  DMS ST 031    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Measure Vertical Angles  VAs  Zenith Distances  ZDs  With Theodolites  052 260 1329    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given an operational theodolite set up over  a station  a target set up over a station  a tripod  a plumb bob  a 2 meter tape measure  Defense Mapping  School  DMS  Special Text  ST  031  an
70.  serial number of the instrument being used  block 1f      The type of day it is  for example  clear  overcast  or cloudy   block 19      The type of wind  for example  calm  slight breeze  breezy  or windy   block 1h      The weather  for example  cold  cool  warm  or hot   block 1i      The name of the starting benchmark or the temporary benchmark for the section  block 1j      The name of the closing benchmark or the temporary benchmark for the section  block 1k      The full date  block 11      The starting time  24 hour system  and ending time  block 1m      The name of the line or net  for example  WAAF net 1   block 1n    NOTE  Leave the sequential page number block blank until the line  net  or section is completed   o  The name of the starting benchmark or the temporary benchmark  for example  TRENO 4    block 10      53 x       5o0 0000099    2  Enter the wire reading  in millimeters  for the backsight  BS  and the foresight  FS  observed  the BS  is on the left side of the page and the FS is on the right side of the page    a  Top wire  largest numerical reading   blocks 2a    b  Middle wire  blocks 2b    c  Bottom wire  blocks 2c      3  Determine and enter the stadia intervals  no decimal    a  Subtract the middle wire reading from the top wire reading block and enter the sum in blocks  3a   b  Subtract the bottom wire reading from the middle wire reading and enter the sum in blocks 3b   NOTE  The maximum allowable difference between steps 3a and 3b is  3  If the
71.  than 3  reobserve    Determine and enter the sum of intervals in blocks 6c    Determine and enter the mean middle wire reading in millimeters to one decimal place in block  6d     7  Compute and enter the cumulative totals     a     Add the sums in blocks 3e and 5a  the sum of the second set of near rod readings  and enter  this value in block 7a       Add the sums in blocks 3d and 5d and enter this value in block 7b  perform a page check by    dividing block 7a by 3        Add the sums in blocks 3c and 5c and enter this value in block 7c     Add the sums in blocks 4e and 6a  the sum of the second set of near rod readings  and enter    this value in block 7d       Add the sums in blocks 4d and 6d and enter this value in block 7e  perform a page check by    dividing block 7d by 3        Add the sums in blocks 4c and 6c and enter this value in block 7f     Subtract block 7c from block 7f and enter this value in block 7g     8  Apply the correction for curvature and refraction  Table 052 260 1109 1      3   104    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    Meters Rod in Meters  0 to 27 L     00        27 0 to 46 8  46 8 to 60 4     89510973   _  06         Table 052 260 1109 1  Corrections Applied to Distances    NOTE  Due to the short distance from the instrument to the near rod  no corrections are required to these  readings    a  Divide the sum in blocks 4c by 10  far rod distance   Use this distance as an argument to  determine the correction  Enter the determined correction
72.  than 45    The instrument will be set up according to task 052 260 1134   and both targets will be set up according to task 052 260 1122  Obtain the help of an instrument operator  who is qualified according to task 052 260 1134     3   60    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to record the horizontal  directions for theodolites     Performance Measures    1             o N O    A C PD      2 3     N      14   15     16     17     Entered administrative data on NIMA Form 8240 24       Numbered each individual position in sequence      Named each individual station observed      Listed the telescope direction for each station      Provided the instrument operator with the circle settings  when it was necessary     Recorded the D reading for the rear station      Recorded the D reading for the forward station      Recorded the R reading for the forward station      Recorded the R reading for the rear station      Computed the mean of the seconds of the D and R readings for each station     Computed and recorded the angle between the stations      Repeated performance steps 2 through 11 for the second position       Computed and recorded the mean station angle and checked for rejection of the    observed angle   Repeated performance steps 2 through 12 for the explement angle     Computed and recorded the mean explement angle and checked for rejection of  the observed angle     Computed the circle closure for
73.  the GO block if the soldier demonstrates task proficiency to the SM standards   Keep this form current by always recording the most recent date on which the soldier  demonstrated task proficiency     Record the date in the NO GO block if the soldier failed to demonstrate task proficiency to the  SM standards  Soldiers who fail to perform the task should be retrained and evaluated until they  can do the task  Once the soldier performs the task correctly  enter the date in the GO block and  erase the previous entry from the NO GO block     Read down each column  GO NO GO  to determine the training status of that individual  This  will give the trainer a quick indication of tasks on which a soldier needs to be trained or  evaluated     Read across the rows for each task to determine the training status of all the soldiers  The  trainer can readily see on which tasks training should be focused     Add the names of newly assigned soldiers to one of the blank columns     Line through the training status column of any soldier who departs from the unit     NOTE TO THE TRAINING MANAGER  The training status of groups can be maintained  such as  team  squad  or platoon  in a key critical military occupational specialty  MOS  at any level by  entering the level  such as 1st platoon  2nd platoon  or 3rd platoon  in the column headings   Simply have the trainers report the percentage of their soldiers who have  GO blocks  and have  not  NO GO blocks  demonstrated proficiency on each task 
74.  the PNO and P CODE and press the ENT button     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  NOTE  The information for the initial BSs is not remembered in the program  however  subsequent  stations will be remembered     n            Enter the TH  The display will appear as follows     Display  D BAR       P27 15 04          231 1444              86 5715    Make a two face pointing on the BS target     NOTE  Reciprocal distances ensure a better closure     p     q   r      lt C Hon    W   X     y     Press the REG button once the distance is displayed and measured the appropriate number of  times    Press the YES button to answer the  MORE   prompt    Enter 1 for the FS measurement  The AISI will beep three to five times  The display will appear  as follows     Display  D BAR       P27 15 07  INFO         55 0  NEW         FORESIGHT       Press the YES button      Enter the FS PNO   Should already be present       Enter the P CODE   Should already be present       Enter the TH   Should already be present   The display will appear as follows     Display  D BAR      P27 15 10                  317 3456    Make the two face pointings on the FS   Press the REG button once the distance measurement is complete   Repeat steps 3k through x to meet the angle number requirements     4  Move to the forward station     a   b          Press the NO button at       MORE   prompt   Press the NO button at the  END OF TRAVERSE   prompt   Press the power  PWR  button to turn the AISI off and move t
75.  the accuracy of the readings  Tell the soldier to  measure the difference in elevation with a level     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Paced the correct distance                   3 116    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Measures GO NOGO  2  Leveled the bull s eye bubble and said  Bubble leveled                    Sighted on the rear rod and took three wire readings                   Sighted on the forward rod and took three wire readings                   3  4  5  Verified the correctness of the rod reading with the recorder                 6  Moved the level crew to the next setup                 7      Repeated steps 1 through 6 to complete the level line                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 5820  DMS ST 031    3 117    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Compute a Differential Level Line  052 260 1340    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a secure field environment  given a programmable calculator   field notes containing field observations for third order double run differential levels  and Department of  the Army  DA  Form 1942     Standards  Check the field notes for omissions and errors  abstract the field data  compute the error of  closure  EC   and adjust the elevations of the intermediate stations  Compute the final elevation to three  decimal places  All entrie
76.  the combined station and explement angles and  checked for rejection of the observed angles     Gave NIMA Form 8240 24 to the instrument operator to check     NO GO    Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References    Required Related  DMS ST 032  NIMA FORM 8240 24    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Record Vertical Angles  VAs  Zenith Distances  ZDs  for Theodolites  052 260 1227    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given Department of the Army  DA  Form  5817 for VA ZD measurements  and a theodolite with an instrument operator making VA or ZD  observations     Standards  Demonstrate the ability to record VA or ZD field notes to the nearest one tenth of a  millimeter  All records must be neat and legible and all computations must be complete and without error   The number of repetitions must be according to project specifications     Performance Steps    1  Enter administrative data on DA Form 5817 in blocks 1  Figures 052 260 1227 1 and 052 260 1227   2      STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps                     V1 00             REMARKS    INSTRUMENT    WEATHER                                           ZENITH DISTANCE VERTICAL ANGLE    For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADCC                                    F EE       P     Figure 052 260 1227 1    Sample of DA Form 581
77.  the operator s maintenance and instrument tests   7  Instruct the operator to list uncorrectable faults on DA Form 2404     8  Perform a final inspection on the equipment     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Have on hand either a traverse  a  GPS  or leveling equipment  a tripod  the maintenance manual or applicable TM for the equipment  the  appropriate cleaning materials  an adjusting pin  a blank sheet of paper  and an assistant trained  according to task 051 260 1131 to act as an instrument operator  In order to perform the instrument tests   this task must be done outside during daylight hours     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Identify the equipment and the    3   132    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    instrument operator  Explain that scoring will be GO or NO GO based on the successful completion of all  performance measures  Tell the soldier to supervise operator maintenance of the survey equipment     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Assigned personnel to perform maintenance on the survey equipment according             to the maintenance manual or applicable TM     2  Instructed the operator to perform troubleshooting according to the maintenance          checklist for the equipment during or
78.  the sign in block 8     C     H  x  h rho    H x   h squared   rho squared      where     H   Horizontal distance    h   Mean elevation    rho   Radius of curvature     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    9  Compute the geodetic distance  S   Use the following formula  Record it to three decimal places in  block 9     S H  EC  C    where     H   Horizontal distance    EC   Eccentric correction    C   Sea level reduction factor     10  Sign and date the form in blocks 10     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him if a horizontal or geodetic  calculation is required  Tell him to compute distances     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Checked all entries and computations on NIMA Form 8900 2 and corrected them             xc  if it was necessary     2  Computed and recorded the instrument and reflector elevations                 3  Computed and recorded the difference in elevation  d                    4  Computed and recorded the horizontal distance  H                  NOTE  If only the horizontal distance  H  calculation is required  go to step 10     5  Computed and recorded the mean elevation  h                    Determined the radius of curvature  
79.  the test  Tell him to collect site information  for DGPS planning     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Read and complied with the project directive or OPORD                 Obtained station descriptions for all points to be included in the survey                    Recovered all stations and ensured that they were not disturbed              Entered administrative data for the station on the recording sheet      m     Performed and recorded observations on the recording sheet                     Plotted the observations on the recording sheet                     O oO A              Identified and recorded listed possible radio or multipath problems on the             recording sheet     8  Reconnoitered the route between all points to be surveyed  Identified any             overhead obstructions that would prohibit the use of the kinematic survey method  on the recording sheet     Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly   References    Required Related  DMS ST 005    3   128    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Skill Level 2    Subject Area 1  General    Perform Operator Maintenance on Theodolites  052 260 2338    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a secure field environment  given a theodolite  with all  accessories and the applicable technical manuals  TMs    an area with at least 100 meters visibility  and  appropriate cleaning material
80.  the true correction value    b  Round one correction up to the nearest 0 1 decimal place and one correction down to the  nearest 0 1 decimal place if the correction cannot be equally divided by two  The larger of the  two corrections is applied to the larger of the angles  for example  an error of  02 7  is equal to  a correction of  01 4  and  01 3       11  Apply the corrections to determine the corrected station and explement angles and record the values  in block 11   NOTE  If the sum of the corrected angles does not equal 360    a math error has been made     12  Sign and date the form in blocks 12     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to abstract horizontal  angles     Performance Measures    1     a       I          o N       11     12     Filled out the headings on DA Form 1916       Recorded the observed data     Summed the seconds of the readings     Meaned the seconds of the readings       Rejected any readings that did not meet the specifications  Redetermined the    mean of the seconds       Entered the EC in seconds  if it was applicable      Algebraically added the mean station angle with the EC     Determined the mean explement angle   
81.  through 9 for the second position     11  Reject positions that are not within specifications and reobserve them  if necessary     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Select and mark two survey stations   The distance between the stations should be greater than 100 meters  The instrument will be set up  according to task 052 260 1134 and the target will be set up according to task 052 260 1122  There  should be at least a 5   difference vertically between the two stations  Obtain the help of a recorder who is  qualified according to task 052 260 1227     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him the station to be occupied  and the station to be observed  Tell him how many VAs ZDs are to be observed and that the height of  target  HT  will be furnished by the evaluator  if necessary  Tell him to measure VAs ZDs with a  theodolite     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Measures    1             o N O      A    PD                   Checked the eyepiece for parallax  Removed the parallax  if it was necessary       Checked the level of the instrument  Adjusted the instrument  if it was necessary     Located and focused on the station s target to be observed      Told the recorder the name of the occupied 
82.  tripod over the survey station  attach the plumb bob  and position the tripod so that the  plumb point is within 1 centimeter of the center of the survey station  The tripod head should be  horizontal      Ensure the stability of the tripod      Remove the cover from tripod head and install the survey target      Use the foot screws and the bull s eye level bubble on the tribrach to level the target      Plumb the target over the survey station using the plumb bob or optical plummet on the  tribrach  Tighten the target on the tripod head  The target will be plumb within   2 millimeters  from the center  and the tribrach will not overhang the edge of the tripod head     2  Level the target   a  Recheck the level of the target and ensure that it is plumb over the survey station   b  Use the foot screws on the tribrach and the following steps to level the horizontal level vial on  the target     1  Turn the target so that the level vial is parallel to a line joining any two foot screws  Bring  the bubble in the level vial to the center of the vial     2  Turn the target 90   and bring the bubble toward the level using only one third of the  distance that the bubble moved off center     3  Turn the target back to its original position  If the target is not level  repeat steps 1 and 2  until the bubble moves no more than one graduation on the level vial when the target is  rotated through 360      c  Recheck the plumb of the target     3  Measure the height of target  HT  from th
83.  uy   1333   SH313W  34019019 NOILVZINVOuO 193f 0uUd                   s  Aouade 1uauodoud aq    TEE pt c Wal 225    510 JO asn 103 Eur  gt  WAL   WEL  S13A31 30 NOILVLNdWOD            3NI1             Figure 052 260 1340 2  Completed Sample of DA Form 1942    3   120    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  a  Complete the headings  blocks 2a    b  Enter the name of the beginning benchmark in blocks 2b   c  Enter the name of the benchmark that the elevation is being computed for in blocks 2c   d  Enter the name of the ending benchmark in block 2d   e  Enter the name of the beginning benchmark for each section in block 2e   NOTE  See blocks 2b for the first benchmark   f  Enter the name of the ending benchmark for each section in blocks 2f   NOTE  See block 2d for the ending benchmark   g  Enter the direction of the run  forward or backward  in blocks 2g     3  Compute and enter the length of each section to the nearest 0 001 kilometer   a  Abstract the length of the forward and backward runs per section and enter these amounts to  the nearest 0 001 kilometer in blocks 3a  in their respective directions    b  Compute the length of the line by adding the shortest distance of each section of the level line  and enter this amount in block 3b   c  Enter the total length of the line in blocks 3c     4  Compute and enter the observed elevation for each benchmark to the nearest 0 0001 meter    a  Compute the observed difference in elevation  DE  of the forward and backward runs pe
84. 05 25    DA FORM 1962  FEB 57 EDITION OF FEB 57 IS OBSOLETE  USAPA V1 01       Figure 052 260 2490 5  Completed Sample of DA Form 1962    3 182    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  NOTE  This adjustment is performed after the preliminary position computations have been completed for  the entire traverse    a  Fill in administrative data and list the traverse stations in order from first to last in blocks 2a    b  List the observed field angles next to the appropriate station in block 2b    c  Compute the azimuth from the final traverse station to the azimuth control mark by adding the  last back azimuth and the observed field angles at the last traverse station  If necessary   subtract 360   and record this value in block 2c to one decimal place    d  Record the fixed azimuth from the last traverse station to the azimuth control mark and record  this value in block 2d to one decimal place  This is the  known  or previously surveyed azimuth  over the line    e  Compute the error in azimuth closure using the following formula and record it in block 2e to  one decimal place with the sign      error   computed azimuth   fixed azimuth    f  Compute the allowable error  AE  and record it in block 2f   NOTE  Refer to DMS ST 031 for the accuracy specifications of the AE   g  Compute the correction per station using the following formula and record it in block 2g     Correction per station     error divided by the number of stations    NOTE  The correction has the opposite sign 
85. 052 260 1335 7      STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    COMPUTATION OF ELEVATIONS    LOCATION FROM  3a NONRECIPROCAL OBSERVATIONS    ORGANIZATION DATE  YYYYMMDD     By calculating machine   3a For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331 the proponent  3a agency is TRADOC     Station 1  occ                                                                       k in secs         90         k                          Corrected elevation            p of  ha h             0 5 m s    k in secs   psn       DA FORM 1947  1 FEB 57            V1 01    Figure 052 260 1335 6  Sample of DA Form 1947 With Block Numbers    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    PROJECT  COMPUTATION OF ELEVATIONS  Examp  LOCATION FROM                     NONRECIPROCAL OBSERVATIONS  ORGANIZATION DATE                     By calculating machine     For use of this form  see FM 3  nae 331 the proponent  Station 1  occ               TPO                gency is TRAD  Station 2  obs        prim    181930 08 3   Qe   342 253    E 2d  5 ly  3   o  531906  1  000066 34           03          34  35  09 2    84750 08 3               um  a and mean             icra   anado     42     eps  ot ib    Q 4230 0 4240     T  52        vadis di 524 56 2     5220 57  1     tan  90    6   k  000120222   0 0d6 2 24  05     gt    gt               e            1 00000 24 2    aie    0000000           T   Gorecied elevation MES SD  A 000m ESSEN E RIDGE RUE        TNNT HE                        eee lee                                
86. 1    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps   2  Station names    3  Station angles    4  Station grid coordinates    5  Grid distances   c  DA Form 1947 Figure 052 260 2491  1     1  Known and unknown station names    2  Object sighted    3  Zenith distance    4  Azimuth of line    5  Mean latitude    6  Weighted mean coefficient    7  Grid distance    8  Elevations of the occupied stations    9  Heights of instrument  Hls      2  Check all computations on the following forms to ensure that they are correct   a  DA Form 1920     1  Unknown angles     2  Sines of the angles     3  Ratios     4  Each side of the triangle    b  DA Form 1938    Grid azimuth     Position computations   Two independently computed positions within   0 002   c  DA Form 1947    1  Mean radius of curvature    2  Value for p sine 1     3  Value for k in seconds    4  Angular computations    5    6          3  Difference in northings      and eastings  E            Elevation determinations   Both independently determined elevations for the unknown station agree and meet project  specifications     3  Ensure that the computed positions and elevations are true and correct     4  Ensure that each form is signed and dated     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  The evaluat
87. 1  Checked DA Form 1916 to ensure that all entries were complete  neat  legible           and correct     2  Checked DA Form 1916 to ensure the accuracy of angles turned                     169    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1916  DMS ST 031    3 170    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Check Vertical Angle  VA  Zenith Distance  ZD  Field Data  052 260 2488    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor  given a completed Department of the Army  DA  Form 5817   abstracts for VAs ZDs  a completed DA Form 1943  the project directive  Defense Mapping School  DMS   Special Text  ST  031  and a scientific calculator     Standards  Check DA Form 5817 to ensure that all entries recorded during VA ZD observations are  complete  neat  legible  and correct  All entries must conform to third order specifications and the unit s  standing operating procedure  SOP   Correct any errors or omissions that are found     Performance Steps    1  Check DA Form 5817 to ensure that all entries are complete  neat  legible  and correct  in addition   check the following items   a  An index of control points   b  A description of the network       A sketch of the work completed   d  A list of the survey party personnel   e  The instrument data     2  Check DA Form 5817 to ensure the accuracy of angles o
88. 1 and 2 for the AISI    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps     1  Press the PRG button  enter 40  and press the ENT button     2  Enter the program number at the  PROG NO   prompt  If a program exists  the  VIEW    prompt will appear  If it does not  go to step  4      3  Press the YES button to view the program or the NO button to delete the program and  then the YES button to confirm the deletion     4  Enter the program number at the  PROG NO   prompt     5  Enter the program name at the  NAME   prompt  Press the letter  a  for the aloha mode     6  Press the YES button at the  LOGON   prompt  Respond with YES to the  LOGON    prompt for Program 1 and respond with NO to the  LOGON   prompt for Program 2     7  Enter the label number from the label list in the AISI operator s manual for step 1  for  example  enter 79      8  Enter the label type from the UDS label type list from the AISI operator s manual  for  example  enter 9 and press the ENT button  then enter 19 and press the ENT button      9  Press the YES or NO button to the  QUESTION   prompt      10  Enter the other labels according to Table 052 260 1336 1     2  Perform the field procedure     a  Set up and plumb the instrument     1  Open the tripod  and with the cover on  attach the plumb bob     2  Place the tripod over the survey control station and ensure that it is plumb over the survey  mark  Imbed the tripod legs firmly in the ground     3  Adjust the tripod legs until the tripod head is horizontal  E
89. 2  Abstract the times  for reciprocal angles only  and the date from DA Form 5817   a  Enter the year  month  and date  YYY MMDD  that the observation was made on DA Form  1943 in block 2a   b  Enter the starting time of the observation on DA Form 1943 in block 2b   c  Enter the ending time of the observation on DA Form 1943 in block 2c     3  Abstract the height of the object above the station  only for reciprocal angles on occupiable targets   from DA Form 5817   a  Enter the name of the object observed on DA Form 1943 in block 3a   b  Enter the height of the object above the station on DA Form 1943 in block 3b    1  Use the height from the sketch of the target observed for nonreciprocal observations from  DA Form 5817    2  Use the field data recorded at the station observed for reciprocal observations from DA  Form 5817     4  Abstract the height of instrument  HI   t  above the station from DA Form 5817  Enter the height to  the nearest millimeter on DA Form 1943 in block 4     5  Compute and enter the t o on DA Form 1943 in block 5  where appropriate  using the formula t o     6  Abstract the observed VAs ZDs from DA Form 5817   a  Enter the degrees  minutes  and seconds  DDD MMSS  from the first position on DA Form  1943 in block 6a   b  Enter only the seconds for additional positions     7  Compute and enter the mean VA ZD on DA Form 1943 in block 7   a  Sum the seconds for all observations   b  Divide the sum by the number of positions     8  Ensure that the VAs ZDs 
90. 2 SM TG    Collect Site Information for Differential Global Positioning System  DGPS  Planning    052 260 1406    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given a project directive or an operation  order  OPORD   instructions on global positioning system  GPS  survey planning  an inclinometer  a  recording sheet as prescribed by the unit s standing operating procedure  SOP   a station description  form for each station to be surveyed  a military map containing the points to be surveyed  a compass  a  30 meter tape measure  and Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  005     Standards  Collect site information for DGPS planning  Plan the survey according to the guidelines set  forth in the unit s recommended procedures and the specifications contained in the DMS ST 005     Performance Steps    1  Read and comply with the project directive or OPORD       Obtain station descriptions for all points to be included in the survey     2  3  Recover all stations  Ensure that they have not been disturbed   4      Enter administrative data for the station on the recording sheet  Provide data for each station that  has obstructions that fall above the 15   elevation         2  OQ                  The station name      The agency      The observer      The date      The observer s height in feet      The map scale      The map sheet      The elevation of the station      The latitude and longitude  to include the datum     5  Perform and record observations on 
91. 26 2      STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps       SALIRE                                                WENN ER  ane  REMARKS    DIRECT    Page of Page    Ip             toD MERC  lb                   7      E    LOCAL       ERGO QUIE Recording Sheet        Wig a 5         ART          LEV  VAL  OCAL  m ppm DATE      WX CHRON        ca          NIMA FORM 8240 24  AUG 97  Replaces NIMA FORM 8240 24  OCT 98  which I  obsolate     Figure 052 260 1226 1  Sample of NIMA Form 8240 24 With Block Numbers    3   58    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps            CHIRON   Louny  WARM  CALM T  SEDE BR       d al B D BN EUM 111    ane MEAN   MEAN   DIRECT REMARKS LEVE 15                 UBER SN iR           ee                  er a ELS REP  eae                02 45 5688                             E  El           dal  t    Ji    tive     ws    Ep    e ole  oI        S   2                  5  v     EJ  8  t2                           e   j  el                M     24   05 39 9     a                            eee       EE         vl  4  foal                   EB           NIMA FORM 8240 24  AUG 97 Checked by  _____5     ZAMBRANO    Replaces MMA FORM 1240 34  OCT  4  which I bao    Figure 052 260 1226 2  Completed Sample of NIMA Form 8240 24    a  The station name  establishing organization  and date of establishment  block 1a    b  The observer s name and rank  block 1b      STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps            o   O      A    PD     gt                The recorder s
92. 260 2490 5      3   180    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    TABULATION OF GEODETIC DATA  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC        LOCATION      2a    STATION                                                 TABULATED BY DATE                    CHECKED BY DATE  YYYYMAIDO   2j 23    DA FORM 1962  FEB 57 EDITION OF FEB 57 IS OBSOLETE  USAPA V1 01    Figure 052 260 2490 4  Sample of DA Form 1962 With Block Numbers    3   181    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps              TABULATION OF GEODETIC DATA  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC   LOCATION   ORGANIZATION  Anywhere Anyone  Field Angles Back Azimuths Computed Azimuth haa               Molokai 197   59  37 12    248   06  32 72     Hawaii 266   10  06 29   254  24  37 57     244  49  46 43  77   40  41 94               168   19  29 31     170   21  07 36   192   50  55 51                     Lanai             Kauai                      10    SQ RT  N    number of dists    AE                    Correction per sta                                                                          Corrections Adjusted Field Angles  0 1  193  29  30 4   0 1  160  32  12 4   Molokai 0 1  197  59  37 2   Hawaii 0 1  168   19  29 4   Lanai 0 1    170   21    07 5   Kauai 0 1  192  50  55 6              0 6                                                                                TABULATED BY DATE  vvvvwMDD    CHECKED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD   SSG Zambrano 2001 
93. 6   E7   E8   E9   EC  EDME  ELEV  ELEV TRAV  ENT    EPMS    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    degrees  minutes  and seconds   directed energy  difference in elevation  difference in easting  December   Same as delta easting  only in a north south line   difference in the horizontal aim   difference   distance   Defense Mapping School   difference in northing   difference global positioning system  difference in the vertical aim   voltage  exposure  empty  easting  east  easting prime   private 1   private 2   private first class   specialist   sergeant  Table value E5   staff sergeant   sergeant first class   master sergeant  first sergeant   sergeant major  command sergeant major  eccentric correction  error of closure  electronic distance measuring equipment  elevation   elevation traverse   enter    Enlisted Personnel Management System    Glossary   3    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    F DIST  FDE   FE   FEB   FM   FREQ   FS   ft   GED   GP   GPS   H   HA   HC   Height of target  HH MMDD  HI   horiz   hr     HT                  IN  IN    Individual task    Glossary   4    frequency  fail  failed  Fahrenheit  full   forward distance   forward difference in elevation   Facilities Engineering  false easting   February   field manual  frequency modulated modulation  frequency   fire support  Fort Sill  foresight   foot  feet    general education development   General Purpose  ground plane  Global Positioning System   blister agent  mean elevation  horizontal distance  hour  horizontal angle   hydroc
94. 6th power  p6  and record them to eight decimal places in blocks 4     5  Generate tabular values    Il  Ill  IV  V        and B5 using the NIMA Tables Program for the  appropriate ellipsoid  The given latitude is the argument used  Record the values to the number of  decimal places generated by the program      Enter the tables program      Enter any letter      Select  LONG PROMPTS       Input the station name      Select the ellipsoid      Select  INDIVIDUAL POINT       Enter the latitude      Select the  GRID NORTHING FROM GEOGRAPHIC COORDINATES  option and record   tabular values I  11  Ill  and      in blocks 5h      Select the  GRID EASTING FROM GEOGRAPHIC COORDINATES  option and record tabular   values IV  V  and B5 in blocks 5i    j  Exit the tables program                         6  Compute the grid position          150    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    a  Compute the northing prime       value by using the following formula and record it in block                 1     1   2         4    A6 p6    where         Tabular value 1   I    Tabular value 2        Tabular value      A6   Tabular value A6   p    0001 times the difference in longitude or p   the difference in longitude divided by 10 000  p2   p squared   p4   p to the fourth power          p to the sixth power      Compute the northing  N  by using one of the following formulas and record it to three decimal    places in block 6b     N        Use this formula if the station is in the northern latit
95. 7 With Block Numbers                                       DA FORM 5817  JUN 2001    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    ZENITH DISTANCE VERTICAL ANGLE  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC     INSTRUMENT Wild T2  52119    WEATHER    SFC J  Doe    SPC W  Roe    INSTRUMENT MAN  RECORDER    20010818                          DATE    Lewis  USC amp GS  29    STATION       USAPA V1 00    HT   1 60 meters  HT   1 54 meters                035    475   ________   ms fast       1    MICRO ZEN LEVELS               Pw Te    5            m  3 8 38 c       C     pm  1491    Figure 052 260 1227 2  Completed Sample of DA Form 5817       STOP       CHRON TIME    DA FORM 5817  JUN 2001     amp    a ls        16   o gt   8   wo          aH       od 2   512   2   5            STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    a   b   C     The station name  block 1a    The correct number of positions and objects observed  block 1b    The height of target  HT  and the height of instrument  HI  to 0 001 meter  block 1c      2  Make a sketch of the target as shown and as observed     a   b          Make a sketch of the target as the instrument operator observes it  block 2a     Label the point at which the horizontal crosshair intersects the target  block 2b     Make a sketch of the target as shown to any other stations and record the heights of all  possible points of observation  for reciprocal observations  in block 2c     NOTE  For nonreciprocal observations  the 
96. 8 833    261 WHOS VG     GGWWAAAA  310               GGWWAAAA  31vQ A8 Q31ndWo9    c  000 L A       c  000 124       A    Ga  68205       C88 LLO 6I9C     C                vja 100       z  000 01  x                              Y V                            6158    aY y                         D UIS S X 615698800 H  D  02 85569111        D uis                ngo               OPL ELII 75                 s  KoueBe jueuodoid eu   Lee ve e Wa 925  uuo  510  jo esn 04                                                          103                         53080     NOILVIndWOO NOILISOd    9SJ9APA     9979     BA    8           6195 14  99667          16887 6196    A    vj4   109       0972      000 01 X  v    99  667    86509    D  09 S   A    D UIS S X    89cLVVO O 2509    Liv cc     01    V                              UOJ    NOILV2O1       Figure 052 260 2490 3  Completed Sample of DA Form 1923    3   177    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  NOTE  This computation is for lines under 8 000 meters   a  Fill in the project name  location name  organization  and date and label as a preliminary or final  position computation in blocks 1a   b  Strike out the word    triangulation    and write in  traverse   insert  class and order  in the blank  in block 1b   c  Fill in the station designations as follows  blocks 1c     1  Occupied station    2  Rear station    3  Forward station   NOTE  On the first position computation  the occupied station is the first occupied traverse statio
97. An adequate coverage area that includes several referenced objects   c  Any other marks  in addition to the described reference marks  that may assist in the station s  location such as trees  fence lines  roads  sidewalks  or structures   d  A quantifiable description for the referenced marks  for example  use the tree type and  dimension  road width  building size  and so forth      7  Complete the back of the form with the following   a  The name of the individual completing the form  block 7a    b  The project designation  block 7b    c  The date of recovery and completion  block 7c      Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting  For the purpose of evaluation and training   either DA Form 1958 or 1959 may be used  An assistant may be provided to determine the distances to  referenced objects  However  if the evaluator has made a  master  card form in advance  an assistant is  not necessary  In this case  the soldier would only have to identify the object and the evaluator would  provide the distance and azimuth information  Show the soldier the monument to be described and the  DA form to be used  Identify the quantity and location of any required reference and or azimuth mar
98. CAL  option    e  Select  SOLUTION DISPLAY  and  BEST        Set up the processing session     a  Select  PROCESS  and  SETUP    b  Select  USER DEFINED  and click  OK        Edit the occupations     a  Select  EDIT  and  OCCUPATIONS     b  Highlight the occupation to edit and click  EDIT     c  Use the drop down lists for the station  antenna type  and measurement method to make the  necessary edits and click  OK  when finished       Enter the precise station coordinates     a  Select  EDIT  and  STATION POSITION     b  Use the drop down list to select the stations    c  Enter the precise coordinates for latitude  longitude  and height and include the hemisphere  attribute    d  Choose the position quality that best suits the coordinates       Select the baseline sets and set the reference coordinates     a  Select  EDIT    NETWORK   and  STATIC    b  Select the baseline sets    1  Click on the  ADD  option     2  Use the drop down list to select  FROM  and  TO  stations     3  Select the start time for the session of baseline to be observed and click  OK    c  Set the reference coordinates          196    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps   1  Highlight the first baseline set    2  Use the drop down list to select the reference station for the first baseline set    3  Repeat steps 1 and 2 for each baseline set    4  Repeat steps 8b and c to add additional independent baseline sets     d  Click  OK  after completing the selection of all independent baselines   e  Use th
99. D  DISTANCE GRIO  DISTANCE   METERS   FEET   METERS   FEET     ae                      E      UE     Sa ES  Btwn ane   ape  ae See   The station is located on Storch Barracks  Illesheim  Germany    To reach the station front gate of Storch Barracks  Grid 0082  go straight for 0 1 mile to a four way   intersection  Turn right  west  and proceed 0 8 mile to the gate of the access road and a guard   shack  Follow the access road around the perimeter of the airfield for 0 9 mile to the station site     The station is a Type 70 monument protruding 20 centimeters above the ground and is located atop  a berm     The station is located 75 1 meters at an azimuth of 160   from Building 6680  82 3 meters from the  hot fuel point and 67 meters from the fuel point sign     Horizontal position was established by third order class   traverse     Elevation was established by third order leveling procedures     Building 6680       DA FORM 1959  OCT 64 REPLACES DA FORMS 1959 DESCRIPTION OR RECOVERY OF HORIZONTAL CONTROL STATION    AND 1960  1 FEB 57  WHICH For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent USAPA V1 00  ARE OBSOLETE  agency is TRADOC  P S    Figure 052 260 1323 2  Completed Sample of DA Form 1959    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  NOTE  DA Form 1958 is used when performing a benchmark recovery   a  Enter administrative data on DA Form 1959  Figure 052 260 1323 1      1  The country  block 3a 1       2  The type of mark used  for example  a bronze disk   block 3a 2    
100. DINATES  1a prp t agency is TRADOC                   ELI EINE  N                   DATE  YYYYMMDD  DATE  YYYYMMDD   7    DA FORM 1932  FEB 1957 USAPA V1 00       Figure 052 260 2479 1  Sample of DA Form 1932 With Block Numbers    3 154    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps           PROJECT U T M  GRID COORDINATES FROM GEOGRAPHIC COORDINATES  412 104 E 100 LTPE    LOCATION  SPHEROID  Clark 1866               Station    34   15  34 742      gt      gt            o  o           o      A  N  D    11314241     o                1 2034780    sws      5629 441 _1   39  51 626 _ c  5991 626                        gt  milo   m  gt              2           m         gt               DATE                     SSG Zambrano 20010818    DA FORM 1932  FEB 1957 USAPA   1 00    CHECKED BY         DATE                       Q         D  c  4  m      mo   lt     Figure 052 260 2479 2  Completed Sample of DA Form 1932         155    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  a  Enter the project name  location name  and organization in blocks 1a   b  List the station name and geographic coordinates in blocks 1b   c  Use TM 8358 1 to obtain the following information and record it on DA Form 1932     1  Ellipsoid  block 1c 1    The plotted point will be in one of the bordered areas on the chart  indicating the ellipsoid used in that area     2  Central meridian  CM   block 1c 2    Longitudes that are listed across the top and bottom  of the chart are for zone boundaries  The CM of the zone is the 
101. E    OBJECT OBSERVED AE HEIGHTS        OBSERVED ZENITH     t to   Meters   Meters              DISTANCE    CORRECTED ZENITH  DISTANCE                   ad  D                 Hb            HEIGHT OF LIGHT  ABOVE  LIGHT SHOWN TO STATION STATION   Meters        COMPUTED BY  10    DA FORM 1943  MAY 2001 EDITION OF FEB 57 IS OBSOLETE    Figure 052 260 1313 1  Sample of DA Form 1943 With Block Numbers       HEIGHT OF LI  STA       IGHT  ABOVE  TION   Meters        USAPA V1 00    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps                        ABSTRACT OF ZENITH DISTANCES  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC   STATION      Dart  USGS  56       PROJECT  St Elm  LOCATION INSTR   TYPE   NO    Fort Belvoir  VA T 2 Wild  ORGANIZATION OBSERVER  DMS BGS BTOPO SSG Armando           HEIGHT OF STAND _              DIFF       REDUC     TION TO  HEIGHTS LINE    JOINING  STATIONS               OBSERVED ZENITH  DISTANCE    CORRECTED ZENITH    OBJECT OBSERVED DISTANCE    10818   0915   Dan 1 RM   DMS  1978              8         Hi  ode     z    amp                                                                                          HEIGHT OF LIGHT  ABOVE  STATION   Meters         HEIGHT OF LIGHT  ABOVE  TIO     Dart 1 RM    DATE DATE LIGHT SHOWN TO STATION           8            gt   o                  COMPUTED BY       DA FORM 1943  MAY 2001            V1 00    Figure 052 260 1313 2  Completed Sample of DA Form 1943    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    
102. Form 1932                    Computed and recorded the difference in longitude                    Computed and recorded the p value                    Computed and recorded the values for p2 and p3                    Generated the tabular values for XII  XIII  and C5 using NIMA Tables Program                     Computed the convergence                          Oo            PD      Signed and dated the form                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1932  TM 8358 1    3 157    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Compute Datum Transformations  052 260 2482    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a secure field environment  given the universal transverse  Mercator  UTM  grid coordinates of a point  a scientific calculator  a desktop personal computer  PC  with  the National Imagery Mapping Agency  NIMA  Tables Program  instructions on how to convert  coordinates  Technical Manual  TM  8358 1  and Department of the Army  DA  Forms 1932 and 1933     Standards  Transform the given coordinates in an adjacent zone to geodetic coordinates and then to  UTM grid coordinates  Enter all factors to eight decimal places  Take tabular values VII  VIII  IX  X  D6   and E5 from the appropriate spheroid tables and record them to the same decimal places as given in the  tables  Take tabular values    Il  
103. HT above the station is not required     3  Record the time  to the nearest minute  that the instrument operator started the observation in  blocks 3  if necessary   NOTE  If the observation is nonreciprocal  one way   the time is not needed     4  Record the paired direct  D  and reverse  R  observations as read by the observer for the required  number of repetitions                 a  Enter the letter D for the direct position of the telescope in block 4a   b     Enter the degrees  minutes  and seconds  DDD MMSS  as read by the instrument operator in  blocks 4b       Record the double coincidence  second  reading for the seconds only in block 4c      Enter the letter R below the D for the reverse reading of the telescope in block 4d      Enter the degrees  minutes  and seconds as read by the instrument operator in blocks 4e     Record the double coincidence  second  reading for the seconds only in block 4f     5  Compute the corrected ZD     a     b   C     d   e     f     g     Compute and record the sum of the paired D and R readings on the target for each repetition in  blocks 5a    Compute the algebraic difference between 360  and the sum of each paired D and R readings   Record and apply one half of the difference found in step 5b to the D reading and one half to  the R reading  Record this amount to one decimal place in blocks 5c and include the sign   Algebraically add each entry to the observed seconds of the D and R readings  blocks 5d    Sum the corrected seconds 
104. I     ss39x3 319NY  wr  D   GGWWAAAA  ALYA Nes        NOILYDO1               1 s               jueuodoid        Lee ve c iJ 9as  20  siu  jo ASN   04  D   ANIHOVW 9NILV1n21VO 403  NOILV LOdWOO 319NVIHL                   Figure 052 260 1335 2  Sample of DA Form 1920 With Block Numbers    3   20    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps       10 1A vavsn    SOpIS                  OGWWAAAA           A8 Q3323H9  2 9       1 5 T    q  e s sz  V  02      2520         a 8ue                pue sopis Z   WALD     i g 502  0  urs       ue     aseo                Yd4              9 OLE  Td  YOL                  Lech itl b 0       d       BEE Cb LOSILO __ _              NOILVZINVONHO              300v s               jueuodo d au    Lee    pe    NJ 99S  uuo SIU  jo      JOY     3NIHOVMW 9NILY1021V9 403  NOLLWLNdWOD 319NVIH L    1S 834      0761 WHO VG   ausoddo    3ue ue pue sapis                 v y uis 9 9 uis             apis    so Gue c                 uis 2 g uis q  V uls e   ase       345 001  9 101 elh    1                   3     260 1335     Figure 052  Completed Sample of DA Form 1920    3 21    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps                 JQ  O    ie               Determine side 1 2 by multiplying the sine of angle  3 by ratio      and enter to three decimal             Fill in the administrative headings in blocks           Enter the station names opposite their respective numbers in blocks 1b      Enter the observed angles opposite their respective numbers in block
105. INATES  and press the enter key  The program immediately computes and displays  tabular values VII  VIII  and D6  Record these values in blocks 7e      Determine the longitude and record in blocks 7f  Select  OPTION 6  LONGITUDE FROM GRID  COORDINATES   and press the enter key  The program immediately computes and displays  tabular values IX  X  and E5          3   143    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    8     10     Compute the delta latitude by using the following formula  Round the answer and record it to three  decimals places in block 8     Delta latitude    VIl q2    VIII q4    D6 q6    where     q   E  divided by 1 000 000  q2   q squared   q4   q to the fourth power  q6      to the sixth power  Vil   Tabular value 7   Vill   Tabular value 8   D6   Tabular value D6      Convert the delta latitude  seconds  into delta latitude  degrees   Divide the delta latitude  seconds     by 3 600 and convert to DDD MMSS  Round the answer and record it to three decimal places in  block 9     Compute the latitude by using the following formula and record it to three decimal places in block 10     Latitude   latitude prime   delta latitude    NOTE  If the station is in the northern hemisphere  the final answer will be preceded by a plus     sign  If  the station is in the southern hemisphere  the final answer will be preceded by a minus     sign     11     12     Compute the delta longitude  seconds  by using the following formula and record it to three decimal  places in blo
106. ION  Anywhere Anyone  pr C ae    Difference Correction Difference Correction    o  reom  Ze  7  08 579  0 001    113   53  35 560   1  57 839   0 002 6  41 913  0 001    113   46  53 646   1  34 578   0 001   32   45  54 830  NE                       11173 740  13369 798  11402 707  15074 201  12829 542  63849 988                                                   9 52 112  0 001    nai 2  07 431    0 002 32  48  02 259  7 34 557  0 002  113  29  26 974   ua 2  36 384   0 002 32  50  38 641  7    48 816  0 001  113  21  38 157                                                             Computed difference 08  32 252  39  45 959   Fixed difference 08  32 244  39  45 965   Error arc  0 006 ana b      a  mmm aiii          Difference second 30 804717    Latitude error dist 0 246    ee    Longitude error dist  0 156  LEC 0 2913 Square root  latitude  error squared   longitude error squared     RC 1 217958 697 1  sum of dist LEC   AE 3 196  Corrected latitude  0 00000013  Corrected longitude    TABULATED BY DATE  YYYYMMODD  CHECKED BY DATE                       SSG Zambrano 2001 05 25    DA FORM 1962  FEB 57 EDITION OF FEB 57 IS OBSOLETE  USAPA V1 01                                             Figure 052 260 2490 7  Completed Sample of DA Form 1962         185    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  NOTE  This adjustment is performed after the completion of the final position computations  All values are  recorded to three decimal places unless otherwise noted     a  Fill in admi
107. Ill  IV  V        and B6 from the appropriate spheroid tables and record  them to the same decimal places as given in the tables  Compute the final grid position to three decimal  places  All entries and computations must be accurate  neat  and legible     Performance Steps    1  Enter administrative data on DA Forms 1932 and 1933   a  Enter the project name  location name  and organization on both forms   b  List the station name and geographic coordinates on both forms   c  Use TM 8358 1 to obtain the following information and record it on both forms    1  Ellipsoid  The plotted point will be in one of the bordered areas on the chart indicating the  ellipsoid used in that area    2  Central Meridian  CM   Longitudes listed across the top and bottom of the chart are for  zone boundaries  The CM of the zone is the mean of the zone boundaries    3  Grid zone the point is located in  Find the longitude across the top or bottom of the map  and the latitude along the right or left side of the map  The point where the longitude and  latitude intersect is the grid zone  consisting of a letter or number      2  Convert the given coordinates for the spheroid that the point is in to UTM grid coordinates  see task  052 260 2466      3  Convert the UTM grid coordinates to geodetic grid coordinates for the spheroid that the station is  being transformed to  see task 052 260 2470      4  Sign and date both forms     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that ar
108. MMSS  format   Press the ENT button to accept the entered time or press the ENT button at a precise time  signal  WWV  to synchronize the instrument clock   NOTE  Use the clear  CL  button to back the cursor to the proper position   c  Define the point code  P CODE     1  Press the program  PRG  button  enter 45  and press the ENT button    2  Enter the P CODE at the  P CODE   prompt  for example  enter 1 and press the ENT  button     3  Enter the P CODE identifier at the  TEXT   prompt  for example  enter tree     4  Press the ENT button at the  P CODE   prompt to exit   d  Create a user defined sequence  UDS  for topographic surveys  Refer to Table 052 260 1336   1      3   4   5   6   7   8    KS                th    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    Program Number Name  1 Station Input 2 Topographic  Developer  DMS Date   08 18 2001    UDS Number  LOGON LA Logon of job file number and memory device   answer yes  1 CALL 9 Calls Program 19  admin data   2 STN  Prompts for station number  Prompts for station P CODE    3 P CODE       E Prompts for instrument height    JN LN  Iw  ru    62    Bil         answer no   auto increment  Prompts for P CODE       UT  le ala        FOI m     EI              T    Note  P CODES can be alphanumeric names  such as windsock  TP1  or GPS5    Type  19   1   1   1   1   1   1   7 2    H           LOGON  PNO  H  A  A  D  ND    7  2  4  3  4  2  1 5  4    2 P CODE    3 T    7  7    H  5 V  S    AN NN       Table 052 260 1336 1  Programs 
109. PM  RC PRODUCT x 10     UD  Z  RC   T 2   4  2  SIN ZD x T  H  x 3 280840       MEAN UNCORRECTED  SLOPE DISTANCE  UD  E    ZERO CORRECTION   Z     REFRACTIVE INDEX  CORRECTION  RC   CORRECTED SLOPE  DISTANCE       UNCORRECTED  HORIZON DISTANCE  H      ECCENTRIC   o              Obtained from Instrument Calibration  CORRECTION   EC   Toward Eccentricity must be ADDED     Away Eccentricity must be SUBTRACTED  HORIZON DISTANCE   Hm     H       REMARKS    COMPUTED BY _ m DATE  YYYYMMDD     CHECKED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD        DA FORM 5819  JUN 2001 Page of    USAPA V1 CO    Figure 052 260 1225 1  Sample of DA Form 5819 With Block Numbers       STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    FIELD SHEET  INFRARED  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC    PROJECT  West Range Artillery 3 79    ORGANIZATION DATE  YYVYMMDD  APPROXIMATE DISTANCE  99th Engineer Company 20010818 1 500 m    ZERO CORRECTION  CALIBRATION DATE   OBSERVER RECORDER   0 004  YYYYMMDD          Wilson PFC White  20010818    INSTRUMENT STATION H I  ELEVATION ELEVATION ECCENTRICITY  INST NO  ikhorn  99th Engineer  1 54m INSTRUMENT TOWARD  1268  9    8 AWAY  0 000 m    REFLECTOR STATION     ELEVATION ECCENTRICITY  PRISM  NO   Bullrush  99th Engineer  REFLECTOR TOWARD  R 1268         AWAY  0 000     20 INSTRUMENT TO REFLECTOR          PRESSURE DISTANCE  Meters    Hg     MM          CORRECTION FACTOR  PPM   5  PRODUCT UDxPPM  RC   PRODUCT x 10 6  T   UD   2  RC   t 2   ay   H  SINZDxT         H x
110. R must be manually set to the SPS mode every time the receiver is turned on unless  keyed     7  Operate the receiver to collect static data by selecting QUICK START NOW   NOTE  The screen should say  STARTED SURVEY   Monitor the receiver until it is time to end the  survey     8  Enter the site data into the receiver   a  Press the LOG DATA button   b  Select CHANGES   c  Select ANTENNA HEIGHTS   d  Enter the following information     ANT HEIGHT    MEAS TYPE  UNCORRECTED  ANT TYPE  COMPACT L1 L2 W GP  ANT SERIAL     3  124    Performance Steps    9     10     11     e  Select ACCEPT   f  Select FILE NAME     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    g  Enter the four character station name  the Julian day  and the session number  EX GPS5 045     1    h  Select ACCEPT     Enter the site data on the recording sheet   a  Press the STATUS button   b  List any problems with the receiver on the recording sheet     End the survey     Remeasure and record the HI on the recording sheet     Press the LOG DATA button       Select END SURVEY     Select YES                    Disconnect all components     a  Disconnect the antenna from the receiver and replace the caps       Make changes to the file name and the antenna s height  if necessary       Turn off the receiver and store it in the correct storage container     b  Disconnect the 10 ampere hour battery from the receiver and replace the caps   c  Disconnect the antenna cable from the antenna  replace the caps  and roll the cable from the    antenna to 
111. STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Measure the Difference in Elevation With a Level  052 260 1330    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field location  during daylight hours with no precipitation   given an adjusted  a precise  a semiprecise  or a digital level with all accessories  a set of rods with all  accessories  two survey benchmarks  two rodmen  a recorder  Department of the Army  DA  Form 5820   and Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  031     Standards  Measure the difference in elevation with a level  Operate the level and read the rods with  accuracy  The readings must be sufficient to close a level line or loop within third order specifications   according to DMS ST 031     Performance Steps    1  Pace the correct distance   a  Set up the instrument about halfway between the two turning points   NOTE  The distance between the instrument and the rods depends on the terrain but cannot exceed 90  meters  The backsight  BS  and foresight  FS  distances must be within 10 meters of each other   b  Place the tripod legs so that they are parallel to the line or are in a down slope position if on a  hill     2  Level the bull s eye bubble and say  Bubble leveled      3  Sight on the rear rod and take three wire readings  Press the compensator button  Yell  Rod  to  ready the rodman before the reading and  Relax  to relax the rodman after the reading     4  Sight on the forward rod and take three wire readings  Yell  Rod  to ready the rodman before the  reading and  Re
112. Set Up a Target Set                  ssssesssssssssssssseesses esee nennen enne nnns tnter 3 50  Record Electronic Distance Measuring Equipment  EDME  Values                       3 53  Record Horizontal Directions for                 5                    3 57  Record Vertical Angles  VAs  Zenith Distances  205  for Theodolites                   3 62  Check Field Notes and Abstracts for Errors                    esses 3 67  Compute a Grid Traverse or Side Shot  SS     3 69  Compute Distances                  sssssssssssssssssssses entente nennen senis nnne 3 79  Abstract Vertical Angles  VAs  Zenith Distances  ZDs                                            3 84  Abstract Horizontal Angles  HAs                         esee 3 89  Measure Distances With Electronic Distance Measuring Equipment  EDME         3 94  Measure Horizontal Directions With Theodolites                                                     3 96  Measure Vertical Angles  VAs  Zenith Distances  205  With Theodolites              3 99  Subject Area 4  Level  Determine the Level Error         eene nnns 3 101             a ROO MAN  m etre ert estas e Ha    ete eria sodes 3 107  Record Level Data    ro a mee t iE 3 108  Measure the Difference in Elevation With a Level                                                 3 116  Compute a Differential Level                                              3 118    Subject Area 5  Differential Global Positioning System  Collect Data With Differential Global Positioning System 
113. Sums  means  and differences are accurately computed and entered   b  Uncorrected distances are accurately resolved and entered   c  Distance measurements meet project requirements     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  The project directive should make  reference to third order specifications     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to check distance data     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Checked DA Form 5819 or NIMA Form 8900 2 to ensure that all entries were                complete  neat and legible     2  Checked DA Form 5819 or NIMA Form 8900 2 to ensure the accuracy of                distances measured  Noted any errors or omissions     Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 5819  DMS ST 031  NIMA FORM 8900 2    3 173    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Compute a Geodetic Traverse  052 260 2490    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a secure field environment  given a sketch of the traverse on  Department of the Army  DA  Form 1962  starting and closing geodetic azimuths  all observed field  angles for t
114. a  Unlock the horizontal clamp and turn the instrument in a clockwise direction toward the initial  station   b  Focus and align the instrument on the target as recommended in step 3   NOTE  This completes one position of horizontal directions     10  Use the proper plate settings for station angle observations and repeat the sequence of  observations in steps 6 through 9 until the required number of acceptable positions has been  observed    a  Leave the instrument in the reverse position   b  Set the circle settings as provided by the recorder   c  Repeat steps 6 through 9  The telescope will be in the opposite direction     11  Use the proper initial increment settings for explement angle observations and repeat the sequence  of observations in steps 3 through 10 until the required number of acceptable positions have been  observed     3   96    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps   NOTE  Upon completion of two positions of station angles  the instrument is now pointed toward the  forward station and the observation steps are repeated  The forward station becomes the initial station  and the initial station becomes the forward station     12  Reobserve any position s  that are not within specifications as determined by the recorder     13  Check DA Form 5818 for errors and ensure that the horizontal directions are within specifications     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safe
115. ablish an azimuth or reference mark or a witness post for each permanent survey control point   NOTE  Only one type of monument should be selected  However  each soldier must know the procedures  and minimum requirements for setting up each type of monument    a  Establish at least one azimuth or reference mark or witness post for each permanent survey  control point  This mark or post should be as permanent as the principal point  but it does not  have to be the same type of material    b  Add an additional azimuth or reference mark or a witness post if future identification could be a  problem or if the project directive requires it     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Select one or more points to be  permanently marked that are of use in either a miniature garrison survey training course or as part of a  real survey project  If permanent points are not needed in sufficient numbers to allow all skill level  SL  1  soldiers to assist  demonstrate the task using a few soldiers  Have the others watch the demonstration  In  this case  the  brief soldier  section becomes a briefing to the group and the pass or fail ratings are not  used on soldiers performing the task     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the 
116. al places with the same sign as the  latitude of the occupied station       Compute V times a  Delete the preprinted     sign  Record this value in block 1q to three    decimal places with the sign     V   Correction to the observed angle   a   Constant for the reference ellipsoid       Compute Y2  final meridional arc value  using the following formula and record it in block 1r to    three decimal places with the sign   Y2 Y1 Va    where     Y1   Modified meridional arc value    V   Correction to the observed angle   a   Constant for the reference ellipsoid       Interpolate for the latitude of the forward station  The argument is Y2  Record as degrees     minutes  and seconds and record the seconds to three decimal places in block 1s with the sign       Compute the mean latitude using the following formula and record it in block 1t to three decimal    places with the sign     Mean latitude    latitude   the latitude of the forward station  divided by 2       Compute the difference in latitude using the following formula and record it in block 1u     Difference in latitude   the latitude of the forward station   the latitude of the occupied station       Use SP 241 to determine H and record this value in block 1v to nine decimal places  Enter the    degrees and minutes of the latitude of the forward station as the argument     3 179    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  w  Compute the difference in longitude using the following formula and record it in blocks 1w to  thr
117. al plate setting     4  Make point observations      Sight on the rodman      Call out the station name      Read and call out the azimuth reading      Read and call out the stadia interval reading     Read and call out the middle wire reading                      Repeat step 4 until the field data collection is complete     Check the recorded azimuth  distance  and elevation data     Check the points plotted by the assistant       Ensure that the contours are sketched correctly to represent man made and natural features          Oo N              Ensure that the following information is entered on each data sheet  a scale  a title  the name of the  observer  recorder  and computer  and other pertinent information     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Select and mark two survey control  points within 100 meters of each other  Identify 10 prominent points within a 50 meter radius of one of the  control points  Have a recorder record the azimuth  distance  and difference in elevations  Have an  assistant compute the recorded notes and plot the observed points  Provide the computed azimuth from  the occupied station to the orientation station     Brief Soldier  Identify the survey control points  prominent points to be plotted  and equipment 
118. al transverse Mercator  UTM   coordinates of the starting and closing stations  instructions on how to compute a traverse or SS  Defense  Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  031  DA Form 1940  and a scientific calculator     Standards  Compute a grid traverse or an SS  Compute the scale factor  K  to six places  Compute the  grid distance to three decimal places  Enter the sines and cosines eight decimal places  Compute the  delta northings  N  and eastings  E  to three decimal places  Distribute the error in position by carrying  residuals  Compute the final position to three decimal places  Enter all computations  All entries must be  accurate  neat  and legible     Performance Steps    1  Enter administrative data on DA Form 1940 and abstract all information from DA Form 1962 onto DA  Form 1940  Figures 052 260 1235 1  052 260 1235 2  and 052 260 1235 3      STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps        NR OF PAGES    TRAVERSE NUMBER    UNIT  g METERS        SAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR GRID    LINEAR CLOSURE RATIO                LENGTH OF TRAVERSE        INEAR CLOSURE    1d    ali    TRAVERSE COMPUTATION ON THE       Distances     OOK NUMBER    p    FROM STATION                NR OF ANGLF STATIONS  ANGULAR CLOSURE PER STATION    TOTAL ANGULAR CLOSURE             ORGANIZATION        Aniusten        OooxbtxATES                                     Fitto  Distances          AMIMUTRS                      ANGLE                                                   20                 
119. and  personnel to be used  Explain that scoring will be GO or NO GO based on the correct plumbing  orienting   observing  and plotting of topographic work  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell  him to perform a topographic survey by the stadia transit method     Performance Measures G NO GO       1  Set up  plumbed  and leveled the theodolite over a survey station             STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Measures GO NOGO  2  Determined the HI above the station                   Oriented the instrument                    Made point observations                     Checked the recorded azimuth  distance  and elevation data                   3  4  5  Repeated performance step 4 until the field data collection was complete                 6  7  Checked the points plotted by the assistant                 8      Ensured that the contours were sketched correctly to represent man made and          natural features     9  Ensured that the following information was entered on each data sheet  a scale a                 title  the name of the observer  recorder  and computer  and other pertinent  information     Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 5818    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Compute an Intersection  052 260 1335    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a secure f
120. and record this information for each    level     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    FIELD EXPEDIENT SQUAD BOOK  For use of this form  see AR 350 57  the proponent agency is ODCSOPS    USER APPLI CATION SOLDIER S  NAME    ined i i T    DA FORM 5165 R  SEP 85 EDITION OF DEC 82 15 OBSOLETE USAPPC VLOO       STP 5 82D12 SM TG    APPENDIX C   CONVERSION FACTORS  UNITED STATES  US  UNITS AND METRIC     Table C 1  Metric conversion chart                                           US Units Multiplied By Equals Metric Units   Length   Feet 0 30480 Meters   Inches 2 54000 Centimeters   Inches 0 02540 Meters   Inches 25 40010 Millimeters   Area   Square inches 6 45160 Square centimeters   Square feet 0 09290 Square meters  Volume   Cubic inches 16 38720 Cubic centimeters   Cubic feet 0 02830 Cubic meters   Metric Units Multiplied By Equals US Units   Length    Centimeters    0 39370 Inches                               Meters per second 2 23700 Miles per hour  Millimeters 0 03937 Inches  Meters 3 28080 Feet  Meters 39 37000 Inches  Area   Square centimeters 0 15500 Square inches  Square meters 10 76400 Square feet   Volume  Cubic centimeters 0 06100 Cubic inches  Cubic meters 35 31440 Cubic feet                Section      Abbreviations    Long    1SG  1ST  2ND  A M                   ADJ   AE  AEC  AISI  AIT   AN  ANCOC  ANT  APPROX  APR  AR  ARTEP  ATTN    AUG    GLOSSARY    longitude   divided by   plus   plus or minus   equal   first sergeant   first   second   angle measure   Table value A6   Arm
121. and rotate the eyepiece until the crosshairs appear very  sharp and intensely black    b  Point the instrument toward the target using the coarse sight under the telescope in the direct  position  over the telescope in the reverse position  or the rifle sight over the telescope in the  direct position  under the telescope in the reverse position     c  Look through the eyepiece and rotate the focusing ring to focus the target    d  Look through the eyepiece and fine tune the instrument pointing by using the two speed  vertical  and horizontal motion controls    NOTE  Use the vertical wire for HAs and the horizontal wire for vertical angles  VAs   Use the center of  the crosshairs for simultaneous observations     5  Perform the horizontal vertical collimation test measurements     a  Ensure that the instrument is in the standard  STD  mode by pressing the STD button    b  Press the MNU button and enter 51    c  Rotate the instrument to the reverse position    d  Aim the center of the crosshair accurately at a well defined target at least 100 meters away   both horizontally and vertically     e  Press the A M button in front  A beep will sound    f  Use the motion screws to move the crosshairs off the target    g  Reaim the instrument by approaching the target from another direction    h  Press the A M button    i  Repeat steps 5d through h with the instrument in the direct position    j  Check the correction shown on the display    k  Press the YES and register  REG  buttons 
122. anuals     Performance Steps    1  Prepare the DGPS receiver for downloading   a  Check and or set the DGPS receiver configuration    1  Turn on the receiver    2  Locate the screen that displays the transfer controls    3  Ensure that the baud rate  data bits  stop bits  parity  and flow control are properly set  The  settings must be the same as those in the computer   b  Connect the receiver to the computer   NOTE  Connect the receiver using the RS 232 cable or other appropriate cables according to the  manufacturer s manuals     2  Start the DPGS downloading program on the PC   NOTE  Select or create a project file     3  Check and configure the DGPS downloading program    a  Select the  LOAD FROM RECEIVER  option    b  Set the processing mode    c  Set the communication configuration to match the receiver configuration    1  Set the communication port to match the connection between the receiver and the PC    2  Set the port setting to match the baud rate  data bits  stop bits  parity  and flow control that   the receiver is set to     3  Check the  OPTIONS  settings     4  Establish the connection between the DGPS receiver and the PC with the DGPS processing  program   a  Select the CONNECT option   b  Check the status of the connection   NOTE  If the connection is successful  a status line will display  CONNECT AT    and or the files on the  DGPS receiver will be displayed  If not  recheck the communication settings     5  Transfer the DGPS data   a  Select the files f
123. are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to perform a traverse with  an AISI     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Set up the AISI over the initial traverse point                    Executed Program 27                    Made the observation measurements at the initial station                    Moved to the forward station                    Made the observation measurements at the forward station                     Made the SS observations and continued the traverse                      o oc A              Made observations to close the traverse                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  AISI OPERATOR S MANUAL DMS ST 648  DMS ST 031    TM 5 6675 332 10    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Perform an Intersection With an Automated Integrated Surveying Instrument  AISI   052 260 1338    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a secure field environment  given a complete AISI set  a tripod   a plumb bob  a 2 meter tape measure  coordinates for the occupied and backsight  BS  stations   personnel to operate the targets  procedures 
124. as completed corrective  action initial in this column  STATUS SYMBOLS    tes a defi the nt that pl DIAGONAL        X  s in Ikea s    defic iciency in the equipme places P OMA Leo  whch mus tat be corrected ed to ine increase     efficiency or to make the item completely service   CIRCLED  X              may be operated      A A           as    T NAM INITIAL IN BLACK  BL E B CK INK   directed by higher authority or as prescribed locally  until  fs sper i   rity dw y LOR PENG at ndicates that a    actory    HORIZONTAL          lacet that a required    FOR AIRCRAFT   Status symbols will be recorded in red   check  or test flight is dos but has not been accomplished  or an overdue    has not been accompl  ALL INSPECTIONS AND EQUIPMENT CONDITIONS RECORDED ON THIS FORM HAVE BEEN DETERMINED  IN ACCORDANCE WITH DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURES AND STANDARDS IN THE TM CITED HEREON           EXTERNAL SURFACE DIRTY WIPED DOWN                                                       FOOTSCREW STICKS OILED IT                               DA FORM 2404  APR 79 Replaces edition of 1 Jan 64  which wil be used usare v1 39    Figure 052 260 2332 1  Completed Sample of DA Form 2404    3   190    Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  I
125. ate       JAN 97    Backsight  Face of rod        5    MEAN MIDDLE WIRE  SUM   ROD CORRECTIONS  NOTE            5  E               COLLIMATION CHECK  L  1 l    CURVATURE  amp  REFRACTION  DMS Form 5820 R     Figure 052 260 1109 1  Sample of DMS Form 5820 R With Block Numbers    3   102    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    16 NYE       0285 4404 SAd    SUNA         NI SI                      H10N  NOLLOVJSTM F STH  LELV AMO  SNOLLO33302 CIO  Was    ar       10   _  aia ic van    ees ee         et wa 22             9cl ae    1275 909          en  3     e  Oise   021    5051   oct    a a aa  6912              aes            jo vey   speasajuy  292192104 Jo mng   ON   8 80 0  80   98 025 0E         Jay 40                          ___5501        02851 LSSI  eae    as  news             _08051      aie   078051 Fost  Sasa    a            E  pus   poa Jo ao                                                         2891  PEZI  CYN GATIM Unus LOS  A31 E3AA PULA uns                                      s94           BAS                     Ut W3  TIO I  345       uonEziuga1      MOTHO NOILVINTTTIOO       uone 33afo14    Figure 052 260 1109 2  Completed Sample of DMS Form 5820 R    3   103    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    2  Record the stadia constant for the instrument in block 2     3  Record the backsight  BS   near rod  reading for the first setup     a   b                        Record the rod readings in millimeters in blocks         Determine and enter the stadia
126. ation of the station should be identical with the  original with only a new date added to its designation   If a new disk is set in the approximate location of the  old station  the name should be preserved but the  number  2  and a new date should be added         DESCRIBED   RECOVERED  BY             7a  PROJECT  Tb  DATE FIELD BOOK                      REVERSE OF DA FORM 1959         64    USAPA V1 00    Figure 052 260 121 3 1  Sample of DA Form 1959 With Block Numbers  Continued        STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps         TYPE OF MARK STATION   Germany 170 Monument Stone Kamp  LOCALITY STAMPING ON MARK  LATITUDE LONGITUDE DATUM DATUM   49  28  10 47467  10  23  10 925197  WGS 84 Amsterdam   NORTHING   EASTING   FT     EASTING   NORTHING   FT    GRID AND ZONE ESTABLISHED BY  AGENCY    5 480 852 200  M    600 444 268  M  32U 320  Engineer   NORTHING   EASTING   FT     EASTING   NORTHING   FT   nip AND ZONE ORDER    M   M  November 96 Third    GRID AZIMUTH  ADD    E y TO THE GEODETIC AZIMUTH  GRID AZ   ADD   SUB             TO THE GEODETIC AZIMUTH    BACK AZIMUTH GEOD  DISTANCE GRIO  DISTANCE   METERS   FEET   METERS   FEET     ae                      E      UE     Sa ES  Btwn ane   ape  ae See   The station is located on Storch Barracks  Illesheim  Germany    To reach the station front gate of Storch Barracks  Grid 0082  go straight for 0 1 mile to a four way   intersection  Turn right  west  and proceed 0 8 mile to the gate of the access road and a guard   shack 
127. b  Algebraically add the correction to the middle wire  block 11a  to the last FS middle wire rod  reading  blocks 6a  to obtain the corrected rod reading  Compute to three decimal places and  round the answer  Enter this amount in block 11b    NOTE  Divide the correction by 1 000 to convert to meters before applying     12  Perform adjustments to the middle wire  if necessary  13  Check the C value again  Repeat steps 1 through 12 until the C value is within specifications     14  Initial the form in block 14          105    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to determine the level  error  C      Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Filled out the headings on DMS Form 5820 R          Recorded the stadia constant for the instrument                    Recorded the BS reading for the first setup                    Recorded the FS reading                    Recorded the BS reading after the level was moved to the second setup          Recorded the FS reading                    Computed and entered the cumulative totals                    Applied the correction for curvature and refraction                     Computed the  C  value          
128. b  Press F21 to set the HA     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  c  Enter the plate setting in the degrees  minutes  and seconds  DDD MMSS  format   d  Press the ENT button     8  Read the horizontal and vertical directions   a  Ensure that the instrument is in Program 0         PO will be displayed on the top line of the  display   b  Aim the instrument at a different target and observe the horizontal and vertical directions  The  horizontal angle will be displayed as HA  The vertical angle will be displayed as VA     9  Obtain the distance measurement   a  Point the instrument at a prism and adjust the horizontal and vertical positions until there is a  constant clear beep   b  Determine the appropriate distance measuring mode   NOTE  A prism must be mounted on the target to measure a distance and the AISI will only measure a  distance in the direct position    1  The STD mode is used during control surveys  for a traverse     a  Press the STD button to enter the standard mode    b  Press the A M button for each measurement    2  The D BAR mode automatically repeats measurements and determines the arithmetic  mean value  for high accuracy surveys      a  Press the D BAR button to enter the D BAR mode     b  Select 1 for the normal mode or 2 for the high resolution mode     c  Press the A M button to start and stop the measurements    3  The tracking  TRK  mode is used to find a certain distance  for topographic surveys     a  Press the TRK button to start the measurem
129. blocks 1b   c  Use TM 8358 1 to obtain the following information and record it on DA Form 1932     1  Ellipsoid  block 1c 1    The plotted point will be in one of the bordered areas on the chart  indicating the ellipsoid used in that area     2  Central meridian  CM   block 1c 2    Longitudes that are listed across the top and bottom  of the chart are for zone boundaries  The CM of the zone is the mean of the zone  boundaries     3  Grid zone where the point is located  block 1c 3    Find the longitude across the top or  bottom of the map and the latitude along the right or left side of the map  The point where  the longitude and latitude intersect is the grid zone  consisting of a number and a letter      2  Compute and record the difference in longitude   a  Compute the difference in longitude by using the following formula     Difference in longitude   longitude   CM    b  Record the absolute value in degrees  minutes  and seconds  DDD MMSS  in block 2b  The  absolute value is always positive    c  Convert the difference in longitude to seconds by changing the value to decimal degrees then  multiplying by 3 600  Record it to three decimal places in block 2c     3  Compute p by using the following formula and record it to eight decimal places in block 3           0001 times the difference in longitude or p   the difference in longitude divided by 10 000    4  Compute the values of p squared  p2   p cubed  p3   p to the 4th power  p4   p to the 5th power  p5    and p to the 
130. bserved and that      All administrative items are entered on each page      The sums  means  and differences are accurately computed      The concluded angle is computed and entered for each position turned     The mean angle is computed and entered for each setup      The spread of seconds meets project specifications      DA Forms 1943 are accurate      All entries are neat and legible                       Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  For testing purposes  use automated  integrated surveying instrument  AISI  VA ZD field data  Make at least three pairs of reciprocal  observations or two nonreciprocal observations  Use DA Form 5817 for recording purposes  The project  directive should make reference to third order specifications     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to check VA ZD field data     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Checked DA Form 5817 to ensure that all entries were complete  neat  legible                 and correct     2  Checked DA Form 5817 to ensure the accuracy of angles observed                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him ho
131. button and make corrections on the display  For example   to change the PNO  the display will appear as follows     IMEM JOB 3 19  CHANGE  PNO  DATA   1  NOTE  To change the PNO from 1 to 2  enter 2 and press the ENT button   f  Press the MNU button twice to exit the program     9  Exit Program 11 12 by pressing the power  PWR  button     10  Move to the next station and complete the measurements   NOTE  Program 11 12 does not compute angles between FS and BS points  This must be done  manually  Stored values of BSs and FSs are directions  To determine the angles between the points   subtract the mean BS  HA  directions from the mean FS  HA  directions     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to perform an intersection  with an AISI     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Set up the instrument for an intersection                   2  Executed Program 11 and entered the administrative data                   STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Measures GO NOGO  3  Made the reverse  Face    measurements for the BS target                    Made the direct  Face    measurements for the BS target                    Collected the data for the FS targets               
132. c distance x cosine of the forward azimuth   NOTE  Each spheroid requires a different set of tables for position computation   k  Compute X  and record it in block 1k to three decimal places with the sign   X  X    where    X   Difference applied to longitude       Compute a  constant for the reference ellipsoid  using the following formula and record it in  block 1110 four decimal places with the sign  The sign is always positive           X  10 000 squared  where              X   Difference applied to longitude     3 178    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps                     Compute Y  using the following formula and record it in block 1m to three decimal places with  the sign     YzY    where    Y   Difference applied to latitude       Interpolate for Yo  meridional arc value  from Special Publication  SP  241  The argument is the    latitude of the occupied station  Record this value in block 1n to three decimal places with the  sign  The sign is the same as the latitude sign       Compute Y1  modified meridional arc value  using the following formula and record it in block    10 to three decimal places with the sign     1          Y    where     Yo   Meridional arc value        Y   Y   Difference applied to latitude       Interpolate from SP 241 for V  correction to the observed angle   The argument is Y1  Be sure    to apply the correction for V  The argument for the correction is the rounded thousands of  meters of Y1  Record this value in block 1p to five decim
133. cessary  Compute the geodetic distance  S  to three decimal places  All  computations must be accurate  All entries must be neat and legible     Performance Steps    1  Check all entries and computations on NIMA Form 8900 2 and correct them as necessary  Figures  052 260 1236 1 and 052 260 1236 2      STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    mur   HELDSHEET      EME  es mE          ees 1              UT c  REFLECTOR STATION ECCENTRICITY   PRISM NO   ee eee  METEOROLOGICAL READINGS               PRESSURE   TEMPERATURE  E                        ALTIMETER    P  DRY  C  REFLECTOR INITIAL                              xe Al el     Sample                                               mem       o           s                                                                                     UEP                             _         ___            S H  EC  C    REMARKS      Obtained trom the insirement Calibraberc Use eriy    computing manually     I The                           2  is computed intemalry      the                  Then  UD   A Toward Eccertnoty mus  be ADOED        rrr i UE      COMPUTEO BY CHECKED BY PAGE OF  10    NIMA Form 8900 2 JUN  7                          uo    Z     H 4T d                               Figure 052 260 1236 2  Sample of NIMA Form 8900 2 With Block Numbers    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    mer  FIELD SHEET   EDME  ORGANIZATION          APPROX  DISTANCE  MEAN LATITUDE CALIBRATION DATE   OBSERVER RECORDER  Tu Frc omon                  
134. ck 11     Delta longitude  seconds     IX q    X q3    E5 q5    where     q   E  divided by 1 000 000  q3   q cubed   45   q to the fifth power   IX   Tabular value 9   X   Tabular value 10   E5   Tabular value E5    Determine the delta longitude  degrees  by using the following formula  convert it to DDD MMSS   and record it in block 12     Delta longitude   delta longitude in  sec  3 600    3   144    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    13  Compute the longitude by using one of the following formulas and record it to three decimal places in  block 13     Longitude   CM value   delta longitude  Use this formula if the station is in the eastern hemisphere  and east of the CM of the grid zone     Longitude   CM value   delta longitude  Use this formula if the station is in the eastern hemisphere   and west of the CM of the grid zone     Longitude   CM value   delta longitude  Use this formula if the station is in the western hemisphere  and west of the CM of the grid zone     Longitude   CM value   delta longitude  Use this formula if the station is in the western hemisphere  and east of the CM of the grid zone      where     CM   central meridian  NOTE  Longitudes that are reckoned westward from the Greenwich meridian are preceded by a minus      sign     14  Sign and date the form blocks 14     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator wi
135. ction Part Number 571146152  NSN 6675 01 371  4961  30  June 1994    Self Development Test  17 June 1994  Enlisted Assignments and Utilization Management  31 October 1997    Abstract of Horizontal Directions  1 February 1957   Triangle Computation  for calculating machine   1 February 1957   UTM Grid Coordinates From Geographic Coordinates  1 February 1957  Geographic Coordinates From UTM Grid Coordinates  1 July 2001    Grid Azimuths  t and T  and  t   T  Correction from UTM Grid Coordinates   This item is included on EM 0001  1 February 1957    Position Computation  UTM Grid   1 February 1957    Traverse Computation on the Universal Transverse Mercator Grid  1  February 1957    Computation of Levels  1 May 2001  Abstract of Zenith Distances  1 July 2001    Computation of Elevations from Nonreciprocal Observations  by  calculating machine   1 February 1957    Description or Recovery of Bench Mark  1 October 1964  Tabulation of Geodetic Data  1 February 1957   Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet  1 April 1979  Hands On Evaluation  LRA   1 September 1985   Field Expedient Squad Book  LRA   1 September 1985   Zenith Distance Vertical Angle 1 June 2001   General Survey Notes  1 July 2001   Field Sheet  Infrared  1 June 2001   Three Wire Leveling  1 July 2001    Training the Force  15 November 1988   Battle Focused Training  30 September 1990   How to Conduct Training Exercises  10 September 1984   Training for Mobilization and War  25 January 1985   Topographic Survey
136. ctor that takes in consideration of refraction and the curvature of the earth     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps      Compute h2  h1   s tan 90     21   k   and enter it in block          where    h2   Unknown elevation   h1   Known elevation   21   Zenith distance       A factor that takes in consideration of refraction and the curvature of the earth   p  Enter the elevation for the occupied station  h1  in block 3p   q  Enter the height of instrument  HI  at the occupied station in block 3q   r  Determine the elevation of the observed station by adding h2 h1  h1  and HI and enter it in  block 3r   s  Repeat steps 3b through r for observations taken from the other end of the baseline   t  Sign and date the form in blocks 3t     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to compute an  intersection     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Used the sketch of the triangle on DA Form 1962 to label the first unknown point        as  1 and the points clockwise as unknown points  2 and  3  Completed the  triangle computation on DA Form 1920     2  Completed the UTM grid position computation on DA Form 1938                   3  Completed the computation of elevat
137. d a recorder with Department of the Army Form 5817 or other  VA ZD note keeping forms     Standards  Measure two VAs ZDs with a theodolite to third order specifications    20 seconds between  the two VAs ZDs   according to DMS ST 031     Performance Steps    1  Check the eyepiece for parallax  Remove the parallax by pointing the instrument toward the sky and  rotating the eyepiece until the crosshairs appear sharp and intensely black     2  Check the level of the instrument  Adjust the instrument  if necessary     3  Locate and focus on the station s target to be observed   a  Point the instrument toward the target using the coarse sight for the telescope   b  Look through the eyepiece and rotate the focusing ring to focus on the target   c  Look through the eyepiece and fine tune the pointing of the instrument by using the two speed  vertical and horizontal controls       Tell the recorder the name of the occupied station and the observed station      Tell the recorder what target is being observed      Measure the height of instrument  HI  with the help of the recorder or evaluator     Make a direct pointing on the target       Observe and read the direct reading on the station             N    Oo fF      Repeat steps 7 and 8 in the reverse position   a  Unlock the horizontal and vertical clamps   b  Invert  plunge  the telescope and turn the instrument 180   to the same target   c  Focus and align the instrument on the target as recommended in step 3     10  Repeat steps 7
138. d field distance     13  Compute the grid distances        a  Taped distances  corrected horizontal field distances  are reduced to grid distances by  multiplying the taped distance by KH  Record this value in block 13a     G H KH    where    H   taped distance  KH   the scale factor used to reduce G  b  Electronic distance measuring equipment  EDME  distances  reduced geodetic distances  are  corrected by multiplying the geodetic distance by K  Record this value in block 13b     G S K    where     S   geodetic distance   K   scale factor  NOTE  Compute the total length of the traverse  Record the values to three decimal places in the  Length  of Traverse  block on DA Form 1940     14  Compute the cosine and sine of azimuths  Record it to seven decimal places with the sign in blocks  14  round the answer      15  Compute the difference in northings  dNs  and difference in eastings  dEs    a  Compute the dN by multiplying the field distance  SS  or grid distance  traverse  by the cosine  of the azimuth  Record it to three decimal places with the sign in block 15a  round the answer    b  Compute the dE by multiplying the field distance  SS  or grid distance  traverse  by the sine of  the azimuth  Record it to three decimal places with the sign in block 15b  round the answer    NOTE  For the SS  skip steps 16 through 21 and go to step 22 to compute the SS station coordinates     16  Compute the errors in the dN and dE  denoted by the errors in northing  En  and the errors in eas
139. d for the next setup                   3  Set up the leveling turn by driving the marlin pin into the ground at a 45  angle el         until it was solid     4  Removed the turning pin only upon instrument operator s command                 5  Compensated the pace count to adjust for any unbalanced length of sight                   6  Read the rod thermometer  if it was necessary                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     3   107    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Record Level Data  052 260 1228    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given Department of the Army  DA  Form  5820  Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  031 an instrument with an operator observing a  level line  and two rodmen with level rods and turning pins     Standards  Record level data  Determine the mean middle wire reading and rod intervals for each  observation  Determine the accumulative sum of the three wire readings  mean middle wire readings  and  rod intervals for the page and the section  Determine the actual and allowable differences between the  forward and backward runs of the section according to third order specifications  Field recordings must be  neat and legible  Complete all computations and ensure that they do not contain errors     Performance Steps    1  Enter administrative data on DA Form 5820  Figu
140. d tabular values    Il  Ill  IV  V  A6  and B5 using the NIMA Tables    Program     3 151    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Measures GO NOGO  6  Computed the grid position              7  Signed and dated the form             Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1932  TM 8358 1    3  152    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Compute the Convergence  052 260 2479    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor  given the geodetic coordinates of the point under consideration   instructions on how to compute the convergence from geodetic coordinates  Technical Manual  TM   8358 1  specified for new mappings   a desktop personal computer  PC  with the National Imagery  Mapping Agency  NIMA  Tables Program  Department of the Army  DA  Form 1932  and a scientific  calculator     Standards  Compute the convergence  Enter all factors to eight decimal places  Take the tabular values  from the appropriate spheroid table and record them to the same decimal places as given in the tables   Record the final convergence to three decimal places  All entries and computations must be accurate   neat  and legible     Performance Steps    1  Fill in the headings on DA Form 1932  Figures 052 260 2479 1 and 052 260 2479 2      3   153    STP 5 82D12 SM TG  Performance Steps    PROJECT U T M  GRID COORDINATES FROM GEOGRAPHIC COOR
141. d to train and evaluate critical tasks which support unit missions during  wartime  Trainers and first line supervisors should actively plan for soldiers holding MOS 82D to have  access to this publication     Most tasks in this manual are applicable to both the Active and RC soldier  However  some tasks are  only for active duty soldiers due to the differences of equipment and missions  Tasks unique to RC  soldiers are identified by  RC  following the task title and grouped into RC unique subject areas     Users of this publication are encouraged to recommend changes and submit comments for its  improvement  Comments should be keyed to a specific page  paragraph  and line of the text in which the  change is recommended  Reasons will be provided for each comment to ensure understanding and  complete evaluation     Unless this publication states otherwise  masculine nouns and pronouns do not refer exclusively to men     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    CHAPTER 1  Introduction    GENERAL    1 1  This manual identifies the individual MOS training requirements for soldiers in MOS 82D  It is  designed to be used by commanders  trainers  and soldiers to plan  conduct  and evaluate individual  training in units  This manual is the primary reference to support that portion of the Integrated  Test Evaluation Program  ITEP  which requires commanders to routinely evaluate soldiers  ability to  perform MOS specific tasks critical to the unit s mission  Army Regulation  AR  350 41 describes the  ITEP
142. de of the ending station   the longitude of the starting  station    h  Compute the error in arc for latitude and longitude using the following formulas  Record these  values in blocks 3h     Error in arc    computed difference in latitude     fixed difference in latitude      Error in arc    computed difference in longitude     fixed difference in longitude       Extract the difference per second for the meridional arcs  meters  from SP 241  The argument  is the degrees and minutes of the mean latitude for the traverse  Sum and mean the latitudes of  the starting  ending  and all intermediate stations  unadjusted   Round the mean latitude to the  nearest minute and record the value in block 3i to the number of places as in SP 241    j  Extract H from SP 241  The argument is the same as the mean latitude in step 3i above    Record the value in block 3j to nine decimal places    k  Compute the latitude error  distance  using the following formula and record it in block 3k to   three decimal places with the sign     Latitude error  distance     latitude error  arc   x  difference per second      Compute the longitude error  distance  using the following formula and record it in block 3l to  three decimal places with the sign     Longitude error  distance     longitude error  arc   divided by H   m  Compute the liner error of closure  LEC  using the following formula and record it in block 3m to  four decimal places     LEC   square root of  latitude error distance squared     l
143. de or the difference in longitude divided by 10 000     Parallax  The apparent displacement of the position of a body  with respect to a reference point or system  caused  by a shift in the point of observation     pass fail  A pass fail standard of evaluation whereby the soldier either does or does not meet the standard     Q  easting prime divided by 1 000 000    Reciprocal angles   An angle measured over a line at both ends in trigonometric leveling to eliminate  at least partly  the  effects of curvature and refraction  Measurements must be made as close together as possible to  eliminate error caused by changing refractive conditions     References  FMs  SMs  TCs  TMs  GTAs  TECs  ARs  and other publications that support training and provide  additional information  A complete list of references is located in the REFERENCE Section     Spheroid  In general  it is any figure differing slightly from a sphere  in geodesy  it is a mathematical figure closely  approaching the geoid in form and size and used as a surface of reference for geodetic surveys     standing operating procedure  SOP    a set of instructions covering those features of operations which lend themselves to a definite or  standardized procedure without loss of effectiveness  the procedure is applicable unless ordered  otherwise     station  a specific geographic location  normally used in context of the layout of horizontal construction     Tangent    A line that is tangent  specifically   a straight line t
144. dentify all equipment and materials to be used by the soldier  Give him a safety briefing  before starting the test  Explain to him that scoring will be based on the proper cleaning  inspection  and    maintenance of the leveling equipment  Tell him to perform operator maintenance on a leveling    instrument     Performance Measures GO    1     Inspected the instrument for damage or wear            2  Cleaned the level with a dry  lint free cloth          3  Cleaned all glass surfaces with lens tissue and solution          4   5    Inspected the level and controls for damage and proper function           Cleaned the level accessories and the hand levels  turning pins  and hammers       with mild detergent and warm water  Wiped them dry immediately       Recorded uncorrectable faults on DA Form 2404         NO GO    Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References    Required Related  DA FORM 2404  TM 5 6675 329 13 amp P    3 191    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Check Level Data  052 260 2333    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor  given leveling field notes recorded on Department of the Army   DA  Form 5820 or other appropriate media  a scientific calculator  the project directive  and Defense  Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  031     Standards  Check DA Form 5820 to ensure that the field notes recorded during differential leve
145. determine it to be a blunder or unacceptable  only after you have  attempted to estimate the standard error of unit weight  scalar     NOTE  If you disable an observation and the scalar is set to alternative  set it back to default and  readjust   c  Return and reset the adjustment controls   ADJUSTMENT STATION  WEIGHTING GPS SCALAR      Set the scalar to alternative     10  Readjust the network  Repeat steps 6 and 7 until you pass steps 8a through g  Do not overscale  step 6  This is an area to watch     11  Complete a minimally constrained adjustment  Once you have passed steps 8a through g  set the  scalar to  USER DEFINED  and enter the value used on the last adjustment   NOTE  You have completed a minimally constrained adjustment and are ready to get the geoid heights  for the points     12  Save the network to disk     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to adjust a DGPS network     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Entered the adjustment module                    Built the network from the TRIMVEC directory                    Summarized the network                    Saved the GPS network to disk                    Entered the network adjustment mod
146. dix C  Conversion Factors  United States  US  Units and Metric   This appendix provides  an English to metric measurement conversion chart       Glossary  This glossary is a single comprehensive list of acronyms  abbreviations  definitions   and letter symbols       References  This section contains two lists of references  required and related  that support  training of all tasks in this SM  Required references are listed in the conditions statement and are    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    required for the soldier to do the task  Related references are materials that provide more  detailed information and a more thorough explanation of task performance     ENLISTED PERSONNEL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM    1 10  The Enlisted Personnel Management System  EPMS   AR 614 200  is the Army s overall system to  improve the professionalism of the enlisted force  It integrates policies relating to training  evaluation   classification  and promotion into an overall system  It provides the soldier with a means to look to the  future and see a realistic  clear  and viable career progression path from private to sergeant major  SGM    However  the EPMS is useless if the soldier does not understand and use it  Part of the trainer s job is to  make sure the soldier understands and uses the EPMS  As an aid  Figure 1 1 provides the trainer with a  career map for the 82D soldier  Along with information contained in AR 614 200  the soldier can use the  career map to develop goals early in his career and plan acc
147. e Army Correspondence Course Program   ACCP    See Department of the Army  DA  Pamphlet 350 59 for information on enrolling in this program  and for a list of courses  or write to  Army Institute for Professional Development  United States  US   Army Training Support Center  ATTN  ATIC IPS  Newport News  Virginia 23628 0001      1 8  Unit learning centers are valuable resources for planning self development programs  They can  help access enlisted career maps  training support products  and extension training materials     TRAINING SUPPORT    1 9  This manual includes the following appendixes and information that provide additional training  support information         Appendix A  Department of the Army  DA  Form 5164 H  Hands On Evaluation   This appendix  provides an overprinted copy of DA Form 5164 R for the tasks contained in the SM  The NCO  trainer can use this form to set up the leader book described in FM 25 101  The use of this form  may help preclude writing the soldier tasks associated with the unit s METL and can become a  part of the leader book         Appendix B  Department of the Army  DA  Form 5165 R  Field Expedient Squad Book   This  appendix provides an overprinted copy of DA Form 5164 R for the tasks contained in the SM   The NCO trainer can use this form to set up the leader book described in FM 25 101  The use of  this form may help preclude writing the soldier tasks associated with the unit s METL and can  become a part of the leader book         Appen
148. e listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to compute datum  transformations     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Entered administrative data on DA Forms 1932 and 1933              2  Converted the given coordinates for the spheroid that the point was in to UTM grid                coordinates     3  Converted the UTM grid coordinates to geodetic grid coordinates for the spheroid             that the point was being transformed to     4  Signed and dated both forms                   3   158    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1932  DA FORM 1933  TM 8358 1         159    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Check Intersection Computations  052 260 2491    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a secure field environment  given a scientific calculator   completed intersection field notes  completed computations on Department of the Army  DA  Forms 1920   1938 and 1947  and Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  031     Standards  Check the field data  abstracts  and intersection computations for accuracy and compare  them to the i
149. e scroll bar to check the list of the baselines selected     9  Process the baselines   a  Select  PROCESS  and  BASELINES    b  Check the number of baselines processing to match the number of independent baselines  selected   c  Select  RESULTS  and  SOLUTION SUMMARY  to view the processing session   d  Click  OK  to exit the processing menu once the processing is complete   e  Review the detailed summary associated with each individual baseline    1  Check the solution types    2  Check the ratio    3  Check the reference variance     10  Save the processing session   a  Select  FILE  and  SAVE    b  Enter comments in the dialog box and click  OK      11  Check the results   a  Select  VIEW  and  NETWORK MAP  to view a map of the network from the main GPSurvey  menu   b  Select  REPORTS  and  CLOSURE LOG  to view loop closure information   c  Select  REPORTS  and  BASELINE LOG  to view baseline information     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  For the purpose of this evaluation   use static global positioning system  GPS  observation sessions     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to process DGPS data     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Entered the DGPS processing program                
150. e top of the form and insert the prestamped survey marker or  disk  see Note 2   If a subsurface marker is used  plumb the disk from a plumb bench    11  Cover the monument with paper  then with soil  Do not use the monument until the  concrete has cured  see Note 4     12  Establish azimuth and reference marks  as required   NOTES   3  Construct monuments with cement  clean sand  and aggregate  preferably crushed rock  in proportions  of 1 2 3  with the top 30 centimeters containing more cement  Where only cement and sand are available   make the lower part one part cement to three parts sand and make the upper part one part cement to two  parts sand  Mix the dry material thoroughly and add water cautiously so that the mixture does not get too  wet  Then pour and tamp the mixture well into the form  for precast monuments  or the hole  To avoid  cracking because of drying too rapidly  cover the monument with paper  cloth  straw  earth  or other  material for at least 48 hours   4  The monument described is the minimum requirement for second order class    specifications   Monuments used for lower order surveys may be reduced in size to save time and money   c  Construct natural monuments     1  Construct natural monuments by permanently marking natural or man made features such  as rocks  boulders  or street curbs  Any object that cannot be easily moved can be made  into a natural monument if properly marked     2  Use a star drill or another suitable tool to make a hole 0 06
151. e top of the survey station to all well defined features on  the target to the nearest 0 001 meter     4  Aim the face of the target so that it is perpendicular to the line of sight between the observing station  and the target     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldiers with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Select and mark two intervisible  survey stations at least 400 meters apart  The evaluator must physically check the plumbing and leveling  of the target  the measuring of the HT  and the aiming of the target to the observing station     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Show him the station over which  the target is to be set up and plumbed  Identify the location of the observing station  Tell the soldier to set  up a target set     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Set up the survey target                 2  Leveled the target                   3  Measured the HT from the top of the survey station to all well defined features on                  the target to the nearest 0 001 meter     4  Aimed the face of the target so that it was perpendicular to the line of sight                between the observing station and the target     Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step
152. ecialty code  MOSC  the soldier will merge into on promotion     Part Two lists  by general subject areas  the critical tasks to be trained in an MOS and the type of training  required  resident  integration  or sustainment          Subject Area Column  This column lists the subject area number and title in the same order as  Section    Part One of the MTP         Task Number Column  This column lists the task numbers for all tasks included in the subject  area         Title Column  This column lists the task title for each task in the subject area         Training Location Column  This column identifies the training location where the task is first  trained to STPs standards  If the task is first trained to standard in the unit  the word    Unit    will be  in this column  If the task is first trained to standard in the training base  it will identify  by brevity  code  ANCOC  BNCOC  etc    the resident course where the task was taught  Figure 2 1  contains a list of training locations and their corresponding brevity codes     AIT Advanced Individual Training  UNIT Trained in the Unit    Figure 2 1  Training Locations  Sustainment Training Frequency Column  This column indicates the recommended frequency at    which the tasks should be trained to ensure soldiers maintain task proficiency  Figure 2 2 identifies  the frequency codes used in this column     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Biannually  Annually  Semiannually    Quarterly  Monthly  Bi weekly  Weekly       Figure 2 2  Sustain
153. ecorded AT THE STATION  SITE  The field engineer should fill in only the  information available and applicable to field use  In  general  the geographic and grid positions  azimuths   distances  and elevations should not be filled in at field  level except when the information is required for an  immediate specific purpose     a  ORIGINAL DESCRIPTION OF NEW STATION     The type of mark used for the station  reference marks   and azimuth marks  and a description of each must be  given in the text of the description  If a disk is used  the  identity of the agency whose name is cast in the disk and  all of the letters and numbers stamped on the mark  which identify the organization establishing or setting  the mark should be given  In many areas the use of disks  is not desirable because of their loss  due to vandalism or  superstition  Less conspicuous marks should be used    under these conditions  This requires exact statements of    the character of the marks  Information for all marks as  to the elevation above or below ground and approximate  elevation above or below nearby prominent features is  important  At least three measurements within  01 foot  should be made from the station to any permanent  marks  features  or structures that would permit  relocating the spot where an instrument was centered     Good judgment should be exercised as to how far these  measurements should be made  It is recommended that  they be made to items which are not in the immediate  vicinity
154. ed areas on the chart  indicating the ellipsoid used in that area     3  Grid zone where the point is located  block 1c 3   Find the longitude across the top or  bottom of the map and the latitude along the right or left side of the map  The point where  the longitude and latitude intersect is the grid zone  consisting of a number and a letter      2  Compute and record the absolute values for the easting prime  E   and the northing prime  N   by  using the following formulas   a            Use this formula if the station is in the northern hemisphere   block 2      N    10 000 000   N  Use this formula if the station is in the southern hemisphere   block 2a      where    N   northing   b             500 000  Use this formula if the station is east of the CM of the grid zone   block 2b    E    500 000   E  Use this formula if the station is west of the CM of the grid zone   block 2b      where    E   easting    3  Compute the value of    by using the following formula and record it to nine decimal places in block  3          E  divided by 1 000 000    where    E    easting prime    4  Compute the values of q squared  q2      cubed  q3      to the fourth power  q4      to the fifth power   45   and q to the sixth power  q6  and record them to eight decimal places in blocks 4     5  Determine the preliminary latitude   a  Divide N  by 30 8  b  Divide the value of step 5a by 3 600   c  Convert the value of step 5b to degrees  minutes  and seconds  DDD MMSS  and round to the  nea
155. ed for recording purposes  The project directive should make reference to third order  specifications     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to check level data     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Checked DA Form 5820 to ensure that all entries were complete  neat  legible                 and correct  Noted any errors or omissions     2  Checked DA Form 5820 to ensure the accuracy of level line runs  Noted any                errors or omissions     Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly   References    Required Related  DA FORM 5820         192    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    References  Required Related  DMS ST 031         193    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Subject Area 5  Differential Global Positioning System    Download Data From the Differential Global Positioning System  DGPS  Receiver  052 260 2334    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor  given a DGPS receiver with a session of collected DGPS data   the appropriate accessories  a desktop personal computer  PC  with the DGPS processing and  adjustment software  Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  096 and 097  and instructions  on how to download DGPS data     Standards  Download the DGPS data into the DGPS processing and adjustment software  Download the  data according to DMS ST 096 and 097 or the appropriate manufacturer s m
156. ed on differences in  environment  location  equipment  dispersion  and similar factors  Therefore  the MTP should be used as  a guide for conducting unit training and not a rigid standard  The MTP consists of two parts  Each part is  designed to assist the commander in preparing a unit training plan which satisfies integration  cross  training  training up  and sustainment training requirements for soldiers in this MOS     Part One of the MTP shows the relationship of an MOS SL between duty position and critical tasks   These critical tasks are grouped by task commonality into subject areas     Section   lists subject area numbers and titles used throughout the MTP  These subject areas are used  to define the training requirements for each duty position within an MOS     Section II identifies the total training requirement for each duty position within an MOS and provides a  recommendation for cross training and train up merger training         Duty Position Column  This column lists the duty positions of the MOS  by SL  which have  different training requirements        Subject Area Column  This column lists  by numerical key  see Section 1   the subject areas a  soldier must be proficient in to perform in that duty position         Cross Train Column  This column lists the recommended duty position for which soldiers should  be cross trained         Train up Merger Column  This column lists the corresponding duty position for the next higher  SL or military occupational sp
157. ed on the display by II 2 1 0   e  Repeat steps 3c and d for the appropriate number of positions     4  Make the direct  Face 1  measurements for the BS target   NOTE  If the difference in the horizontal aim  dH  and the difference in the vertical aim  dV  values are  not acceptable  then repeat steps 3 and 4 again  If they are still unacceptable  the AISI may need to be  calibrated   a  Place the AISI in the direct  Face    position after the reverse  Face    pointings are completed   b  Aim the AISI at the target   c  Press the A M button  The AISI beeps and displays 11 4 1 1 on the last line   NOTE  This completes one BS observation in the  Face    position as indicated on the display by 1 4 1 1   d  Repeat steps 4b and c for the appropriate number of positions   e  Press the register  REG  button to store values  The AISI beeps and goes into Program 12   This program records the foresight  FS  information for the intersection target     5  Collect the data for the FS targets  object being intersected   The display will appear as follows     UDS P12 22 19  STEP 1   STORE  P CODE  _  a  Enter a P CODE at the  P CODE   2  prompt  This should be the name of the object sighted   This is your first FS  Press the ENT button   NOTE  A well defined point should be identified and a sketch of the obstruction should be drawn   b  Enter the TH at the  TH  _ 2  prompt  This will be 0 00 for most obstructions  The display will  appear as follows   UDS P12 22 20  HA  0 0002  VA  92 0244 
158. ee decimal places with the sign  Convert to degrees  minutes and seconds and record it in  the delta longitude block of the occupied station     Difference in longitude   HX     where    H   Correction applied to the difference in longitude   X  X    X   Difference applied to longitude   x  Compute the longitude prime using the following formula and record it in block 1x     Longitude prime   longitude   the difference in longitude    y  Derive the sine of the mean latitude and record it in block 1y to seven decimal places with the  sign    z  Compute the difference in sigma using the following formula and record it in block 1z to one  decimal place with the sign  Delete the preprinted     before the difference in sigma character     Difference in sigma    sine of the mean latitude  x  difference in longitude   aa  Convert the difference in sigma to degrees  minutes  and seconds and record it in block 1aa to  one decimal with the sign   NOTE  The sign of the value may be checked as follows  in the northern hemisphere  convergence is  positive when the forward azimuth is between 0  and 180  and negative when the forward azimuth is  between 180  and 360     ab  Compute the back azimuth  Algebraically add the forward azimuth  the convergence  and 180     If necessary  subtract 360  and record this value in block 1ab to one decimal place     ac  Sign and date the form in block 1ac     2  Compute the azimuth closure and adjustment on DA Form 1962  Figures 052 260 2490 4 and 052   
159. eep   About 5 seconds later  the instrument will beep twice  Rotate the instrument 180  again until  the display is  PRESS A M     f  Press the A M button on the front of the instrument    g  Enter the values for temperature  pressure  offset  and horizontal angle reference  HA REF    HA setting     h  Ensure that the face of the instrument is still parallel to the two foot screws and press the   LEVEL button to enter the  fine level  mode      Level both bubbles by using the left thumb rule to adjust the front two foot screws for the lower  bubble and the rear foot screw for the upper bubble    j  Press the bubble button to exit the level display     3  Set the proper units of measure  time  and date      Press the menu  MNU  button and enter 17      Press the YES button to accept or the NO button to change the units at the display prompts     Press the MNU button and enter 15      Press 1 to set the date      Enter the correct date in the year  month  and day  YYY MMDD  format      Press the enter  ENT  button to accept the change      Enter the correct time in the hour  minutes  and seconds  HH MMSS  format                        STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  h  Press the ENT button to accept the entered time or press the ENT button at a precise time  signal  WWV  to synchronize the instrument clock   NOTE  Use the CLEAR  CL  button to back the cursor to the proper position     4  Aim the instrument correctly at a target    a  Point the instrument toward the sky 
160. emory device to record data by entering the appropriate number  The display will  appear as follows     UDS P11 21 57  STEP 1   STORE  STN   _  d  Enter the occupied station number  SNT    The display will appear as follows     UDS P11 21 59  STEP 2   STORE  P CODE _  e  Enter the P CODE  name  of the occupied station  for example  P CODE   TP   then press the  enter  ENT  button  The display will appear as follows     UDS P11 22 04  STEP 3   STORE  IH 0 000  f  Enter the instrument height IH  The display will appear as follows     UDS P11 22 07  STEP 4   STORE  BS   _    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  g  Enter the BS point number  The display will appear as follows     UDS P11 22 09  STEP 5   STORE  P CODE    h  Enter the BS P CODE  The display will appear as follows     UDS P11 22 09  STEP 6   STORE  TH     Enter the target height  TH   The display will appear as follows     D P11 22 13  HA  180 0001  VA  272 0243    NOTE  The numbers and times displayed are examples only     3  Make the reverse  Face    measurements for the BS target   a  Rotate the AISI to the reverse face and check the BS pointing   b  Press the A M button  The AISI beeps and the display appears as follows     D P11 22 15  HA  180 0001  VA  272 0243  l 1 LO    c  Take the crosshairs slightly off the target then back on by using the slow motion screws   d  Press the       button  The AISI beeps and displays II 2 1 0 on the last line    NOTE  This completes the second pointing to the BS as indicat
161. ence  HA  REF   HA setting      8  Ensure that the face of the instrument is still parallel to the two foot screws and press the  LEVEL button to enter the  fine level  mode     9  Level both bubbles by using the left thumb rule to adjust the front two foot screws for the  lower bubble and the rear foot screw for the upper bubble     10  Press the bubble button to exit the level display   c  Execute Program 43 and enter the known coordinates    1  Press the PRG button  enter 43  and press the ENT button   2  Press 2 for internal memory  IMEM      Enter the area file for point storage     Press the YES button for the target height  TH  measure             3   4   5  Enter the point number  PNO      STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps     6  Enter the P CODE for the station  for example  Belvoir     7  Enter the station coordinates     NOTE  Enter both the occupied station and the BS station   d  Execute Program 20 for station establishment                 13  Press the register  REG  button to exit the program      1  Press 1 for the known station     2  Enter a job number for data storage     3  Ensure that the external memory  XMEM  is off and the IMEM is on and press the ENT  button     4  Enter the station number  STN       5  Enter the area file     6  Enter 2 for the IMEM     7  Answer YES or NO for  STN OK      8  Answer YES for the TH measure and enter 0     9  Enter the PNO for the BS    10  Enter the area file for the BS    11  Answer YES or NO for  REF OK     12 
162. ent of the Army  DA   Form 1934  Field Manual 6 2  and instructions on how to convert degrees  minutes  and seconds   DDD MMSS  into mils     Standards  Establish a declination station according to the procedures outlined in FM 6 2     Performance Steps    1  Locate a declination station that is convenient to the using unit s  and away from magnetic  attractions  Observe the following   a  Power lines and electronic equipment  150 meters   b  Railroad tracks  artillery  tanks  and vehicles  75 meters   c  Barbwire  steel helmets  and personal weapons  10 meters     2  Establish a declination station   a  Provide four azimuth marks  one in each quadrant  to prominent features located at least 1 000  meters from the declination station   NOTE  When the time  tactical situation  or lack of prominent features limit operations  the standard in  step 2a can be relaxed  The minimum distance should not be closer than 300 meters  Two azimuth marks  are desired but one will suffice   b  Determine the grid azimuth s  to the azimuth mark s  by using either of the following methods    1  Compute the grid azimuth if the coordinates of the declination station and azimuth mark s   are known    2  Apply a measured angle to a known direction  Use a theodolite to observe the azimuths  for each declination station   c  Determine the vertical angle  VA  to each azimuth mark   d  Convert all angular measurements to mils  6 400 mils   360        Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier wi
163. ents     b  Press the button for the appropriate mode     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to operate the AISI     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Set up and plumbed the instrument over the designated point                   Leveled the instrument using the dual axis compensator               Set the proper units of measure  time  and date                    Aimed the instrument correctly at a target                    Performed the horizontal vertical collimation test measurements                    Performed the tilt axis test measurements                    Set the horizontal plates                     Read the horizontal and vertical directions                                       A2              Obtained the distance measurement              Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if     steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    References  Required Related  AISI OPERATOR   S MANUAL DMS ST 648    TM 5 6675 332 10    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Perform a Topographic Survey With an Automated Integrated Surveying Instrument  AISI   052
164. erator  to correct only operator level faults and record all uncorrectable faults on DA Form 2404  Perform a final  inspection on the equipment     Performance Steps    1  Assign personnel to perform maintenance on the survey equipment according to the maintenance  manual or applicable TM     2  Instruct the operator to perform troubleshooting according to the maintenance checklist for the  equipment during or after operations     3  Instruct the operator to clean the equipment and accessories   4  Instruct personnel to perform calibration checks for the equipment     5  Ensure that the operator performs only operator level maintenance   a  Inventory of all the equipment components and accessories   b  Wipe the dirt and dust from all components with a dry cloth   c  Clean glass surfaces with lens cleaning tissue   d  Inspect the exterior of the equipment for damage  cracks  and wear   e  Check the motion locks and ensure that the controls rotate freely and function properly   f  Inspect the tribrach and tribrach leveling screws for damage  Clean as required   g  Inspect the tripod  bayonet screw  and other screws and nuts for damage  Clean and tighten   as required   h  Inspect the transport case    1  Open and remove the instrument    2  Turn the case over and shake out any loose dust and dirt    3  Check the exterior for damage  cracks  broken hinges  broken latches  and so forth     4  Clean the case as required   i  Store the equipment in its transport case     6  Inspect
165. es  Enter all factors to eight decimal  places  Take tabular values VII  VIII  IX  X  D6  and E5 from the appropriate spheroid tables and record   them to the same decimal places as given in the tables  Compute the final grid position to three decimal  places  All entries and computations must be accurate  neat  and legible    Performance Steps    1  Fill in the headings on DA Form 1933  Figures 052 260 2466 1 and 052 260 2466 2           139    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    GEOGRAPHIC COORDINATES FROM U T M  GRID COORDINATES  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC     LOCATION   ORGANIZATION  la la    ELLIPSOID CENTRAL MERIDIAN    STATION CM ELLIPSOID  Ib 1   1   1c 2                      8 9  Si ae    IN 7     VIT  VIII    mem     N in NORTHERN HEMISPHERE  10  000 000 000   N in SOUTHERN HEMISPHERE    E FEorFE E _ 4   0000001   E     So           42          q4          q8 9 7 9   Ag           IX  q                   95 2                                  AX    13          gt                 gt     aio    EE          Ix           gt   3                COMPUTED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD    CHECKED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD   14  14    DA FORM 1933  JUL 2001 EDITION OF FEB 1957 IS OBSOLETE  USAPA V1 00       Figure 052 260 2466 1  Sample of DA Form 1933 With Block Numbers    3  140    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps       GEOGRAPHIC COORDINATES FROM U T M  GRID COORDINATES  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC 
166. et the adjustment controls   a  Set the  WEIGHTING STRATEGY GPS STATION WEIGHTING   set realistic errors for the  height of instrument  HI  and plumbing    b  Set the  UNIVARIANT AND BIVARIANT SIGMA SCALARS  to 1 96 and 2 447  Also set   DELUTION OF PRECISION  to display a covariance at 2 sigma   c  Fix one known point  latitude and longitude  set the X and Y in the fix column       7  Adjust the network by selecting the  ADJUST NETWORK  option     8  Display and check the adjustment results as follows   NOTE  Ensure that the steps are within these guidelines in order to have a good network    a  Network reference factor is near 1  correctly estimate the standard error of unit weight   If this  value is greater than 1  the error is underestimated  If the error is less than 1  the error is  overestimated    b  The chi square test passes    c  Each reference factor is around 1    1  not all Os           199    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  d  Various component groups  reference factor is near 1   e  Largest standard residual equals sigma at 2 sigma or 1 2 sigma at 1 sigma   f  Residual is realistic for the method used   g  Histogram has a normal distribution   NOTE  Ensure that 1 sigma equals 68 percent and 2 sigma equals 95 percent     9  Edit the network adjustment results   a  Look for outliers either in the reference factors or in the histograms   NOTE  If outliers exist  they will be at the top of the largest standard residuals   b  Disable an observation if you 
167. etch provided with the surveyor s field  notes     10  Compute the sea level coefficient  SLC   Record it to six decimal places in block 10   a  Use the following formula to compute the SLC     SLC   1           where     h   the mean elevation    R   the mean radius of the earth  If his in feet  use R as 20 906 000 feet  If h is in meters  use  R as 6 372 000 meters     b  Reduce the corrected field distances to sea level  Along any traverse whose variations in  elevation do not exceed 300 meters  sufficient accuracy may be obtained by computing a SLC  for the entire traverse     11  Compute the middle northing  MID N  and the middle easting  MID E     a  Add the northing of the beginning traverse station to the northing of the ending traverse station  and divide by two to compute the MID N  Record this value to the nearest 1 000 meters in block  11a    b  Add the easting of the beginning traverse station to the easting of the ending traverse station  and divide by two to compute the MID E  Record this value to the nearest 1 000 meters in block  11b     12  Compute the scale factor  K    NOTE  A scale factor is required to convert a measured distance to a grid distance  A mean scale factor  may be computed for the entire traverse or for a section in the traverse  Traverses over 8 000 meters  require a scale factor to be computed for each section  Compute the northing and easting of the midpoint  for the desired traverse or section to the nearest 1 000 meters   a  Compute the
168. ext  ST  031    Standards  Perform a traverse with an AISI  Set up the instrument according to task 052 260 1134 and  use AISI Program 27 to collect traverse data  Perform observations according to the guidelines and  procedures set forth in Technical Manual  TM  5 6675 332 10 or the AISI operator s manual   Observations must meet the specifications contained in the unit s standing operating procedure  SOP  or  the recommended procedures in DMS ST 031     Performance Steps    1  Set up the AISI over the initial traverse point   NOTE  Refer to TM 5 6675 332 10 or the AISI operator s manual    a  Set up the instrument    b  Perform an instrument calibration or a quick check        Enter the precomputed        scale factor  to be used to reduce the distances to the universal   transverse Mercator  UTM  grid     1  Press F43    2  Enter the scale factor     2  Execute Program 27     Press the program  PRG  button and enter 27 to start the traverse program     Select new for a new traverse     Enter the number or name of the job file in which to store the traverse data  new only      Select the memory unit  1  2  or 3  in which to store the traverse data  new only      Enter the occupied station number  STN       Enter the occupied station point code  P CODE  or name and press the enter  ENT  button  To  leave the blank empty  press the ENT button again   g  Enter the name of the area file in which the known station coordinates are stored or press the  ENT button to enter the data
169. for collecting data by means of a topographic survey with an  AISI  Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  031  and the AISI operator s manual or Technical  Manual  TM  5 6675 332 10     Standards  Perform an intersection with an AISI  Collect intersection data for three survey targets   prism  poles   Perform observations according to the guidelines and procedures set forth in the AISI operator s  manual or TM 5 6675 332 10  Observations must meet the specifications contained in the unit s standing  operating procedure  SOP  or the recommended procedures in the DMS ST 031     Performance Steps    1  Set up the instrument for an intersection   a  Set up and level the AISI over the point   b  Place the AISI in the D BAR mode and enter 1 for standard  STD  resolution       Place the AISI in the direct  Face    position   d  Enter F21  horizontal angle reference  HA REF   to set the azimuth  Enter 0 0000 degrees   NOTE  Do not press the enter  ENT  button after entering 0 0000   e  Aim at the BS using both the horizontal and vertical crosshairs   f  Press the angle measure  A M  button carefully as not to disturb the pointing     2  Execute Program 11 and enter the administrative data   a  Press the program  PRG  button  enter 11 12  and press the ENT button  The AISI displays the  program name and prompts for job number  JOB NO   _    b  Enter the job number  The display will appear as follows     UDS P11 21 51  1   XMEN OFF  2   IMEM ON  3   SERIAL OFF  c  Select the m
170. for side 2 1 and enter it in block 2k     Compute the difference in northing  dN  by multiplying the cosine of the azimuth for side 2 1 by    the grid distance for side 2 1 and enter it in block 2l       Compute N1 by adding the dN to N2 and enter it in block 2m     Compute the grid azimuth for side 3 1 by subtracting angle   3 from the azimuth for side 3 2  If    angle  3 is larger than the azimuth for side 3 1  add 360   to it before subtracting and enter this  amount in block 2n       Add angle  1 to the azimuth for side 2 1 for a math check  This should equal the azimuth for    side 3 1  It is not necessary to record this value       Determine the sine of the azimuth for side 3 1 and enter it in block 2p     Compute the dE by multiplying the sine of the azimuth for side 3 1 by the grid distance for side    3 1 and enter it in block 2q       Determine E1 by adding the dE to E3 and enter it in block 2r     Determine the cosine of the azimuth for side 3 1 and enter it in block 2s     Compute the dN by multiplying the cosine of the azimuth for side 3 1 by the grid distance for    side 3 1 and enter it in block 2t    Determine N1 by adding the dN to N3 and enter it in block 2u    Compare the two sets of N1 and E1  the coordinates should agree to within 0 001   If they do  not  an error was made in the computation    Sign and date the form in blocks 2w     3  Complete the computation of elevations from the nonreciprocal observations on DA Form 1947   Figures 052 260 1335 6 and 
171. form to the unit s standing operating procedure  SOP   references  and project specifications  Correct  errors or omissions when found     Performance Steps    1  Check the field notes and the abstract entries to ensure that are complete  neat  and legible  in  addition  check the following items  if applicable   a  An index of the control points   b  A description of the line or network       A sketch of the work completed   d  A record of the survey party personnel   e  The instrument data     2  Spot check the field notes and the abstract entries to ensure that they conform to the unit s SOP   references  and project specifications  Note any errors or omissions  If applicable  ensure that    a  All administrative items are entered on each page to include the following    1  The azimuth of line  mean latitude  and calibration date    2  The observer s and recorder s names   3  The project name and the organization     The height of instruments  Hls   height of targets  HTs   eccentricity  and instrument target  numbers are complete and accurate     Any circle settings are correct     The sums  means  and differences are accurately computed     The concluded angle is computed and entered for each position turned     The mean angle is computed and entered     The closure specifications are met     All entries are accurate     Any uncorrected distances are accurately resolved and entered     All measurements meet project requirements     Any errors or omissions are noted     A
172. h  This is the computed ending azimuth  Record it in block 3  in degrees  minutes  and seconds  DDD MMSS   Record the seconds to one decimal place  round  the answer      4  Compute the angular error of closure  AEC  by subtracting the fixed  known  ending azimuth from  the computed ending azimuth  Compute the AEC to one decimal place with the sign and record it in  block 4    NOTE  The error is always equal to the computed values minus the fixed values     5  Compute the allowable AEC  allowable error  AE   using the formula from DMS ST 031 and record it  to one decimal place in block 5   NOTE  The AE is always truncated  Do not round up the AE  because rounding will allow more error     6  Compute the correction per station by dividing the AEC by the number of observed angles  then  change the sign of the answer  Record it to two decimal places with the sign in block 6 and truncate  the answer    NOTE  Since the angular error is accidental  it cannot be said that any one angle contains more of the  error than another  The error must be distributed evenly among the station angles     7  Compute the correction per observed angle and properly assign the corrections to the observed  angles  Record it to one decimal place with the sign in block 7  After computing the correction per  station  if the division does not result evenly to 0 1   produce a group of corrections that are within  0 1  of each other    NOTE  The sum of corrections must equal the AEC with the opposite sign  
173. hat is the limiting position of a secant of a curve through  a fixed point and a variable point on the curve as the variable point approaches the fixed point     Glossary   12    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Target  Any object or point toward which something is directed  also an object which reflects a sufficient amount  of a radiated signal to produce an echo signal on detection equipment     Target station  The survey point being observed on which a target has been erected     task title  the title defines the action to be performed     T O  Height of target observed minus height of observer s instrument  May be either a plus or minus value     Traverse   To turn a weapon to the right or left on its mount  a method of surveying in which lengths and directions of  lines between points on the earth are obtained by or from field measurements and used in determining  positions of the points     Universal transverse Mercator  UTM    A series of 120 coordinate systems that are based on the transverse Mercator projection which was  originally developed by the US Army for a worldwide mapping project  Sixty zones are used to map the  northern hemisphere  and the remaining zones apply to the southern hemisphere  Each zone is 6   wide  and is numbered  Zone 1 covers longitudes of 180   W through 174  W  The remaining zones         numbered sequentially as they move east  All zones have their origin at the equator  use the meter as the  system unit  and have a false easting of 500 000 meters a
174. he traverse  all geodetic distances  geographic coordinates of the starting and closing stations   instructions on how to compute a geodetic traverse  Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST   031  DA Forms 1923 and 1962  and a scientific calculator     Standards  Demonstrate the ability to correctly compute and adjust the geodetic positions of the  unknown traverse stations to the nearest 0 001  of arc  Enter all computations on DA Forms 1923 and  1962  All entries must be accurate  neat  and legible     Performance Steps    1  Perform the preliminary and final position computations on DA Form 1923 using the information  given on DA Form 1962  Figures 052 260 2490 1  052 260 2490 2  and 052 260 2490 3      3 174    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps       OO IA Vdvsn    1S 933    26  WHOS            pautjaapun      addi          Aanay ut jou 2u1  32019   281  Aavay ay             sura          1         008 IPUN  104  31ON    GOWWAAAA         A8                   GGWWAAAA                                              2 7         3       502    h                  eae              502    15     v   e3ICILLI P       uis        uis 10               202        00001  X       v  02 S         DUIS S X     109 X                                   900v  s               jueuodoid ay   Lee ve c Wa ees  uuoj  10  jo asn 204                          uryoew                      104  NOILYINONVIML 343030        A8                       2  000 L 2A   gt          GYV 4      xo1dde   
175. hloric  horizon closure   Same as height of instrument except a target is mounted on the tripod   hour  minutes  and seconds   height of instrument  high   horizontal   hour s     height of target   current  Table value 1   that is   Table value 2   Table value 3   internal memory   inch es   Infantry    See  Task      INST  Instr  INT   ITEP    ITP    JAN  KM    KMS    LAT  LEC  LEV  MEAS  MICRO  MID E  MID N  MIN  MM  MNU        MOS  MOSC  MSG  MSGR    MTP    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    instrument   Instruction  instructor   internal  initial   Individual Training Evaluation Program  Individual Training Plan   Table value 4   Table value 9   January   kilometer   kilometers   left  length  lock   latitude   linear error of closure   level   measure   micrometer   middle easting   middle northing   minimum   millimeter   menu   Missouri  monthly   military occupational specialty  military occupational specialty code  message  master sergeant  high accuracy GPS receiver system  mission training plan  MOS training plan    nose lift relative to baseline  north  neutral  northings  number    Glossary   5    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    NCO  NCOES  NCOIC  NIMA  NO    NR  OCT  OPNS    OPORD    P2   p3   P4   P5  PAM  PC  P CODE  PFC  PGS  PLDC  PNO  PO  PPM  PRG  PVT  PWR    Q2    Glossary   6    northing prime   noncommissioned officer  Noncommissioned Officer Education System  noncommissioned officer in charge  National Imagery and Mapping Agency  number   number   October   operations   opera
176. hrough the optical plummet     c  Use an adjusting pin to horizontally and vertically center the point if the station point is not    centered in the circular marks with the crosshair mark     d  Make sure that the adjustment mechanism is tightened when the station point is centered     Adjust the tension on the three leveling foot screws  if needed     Test the instrument s lighting system     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Select and mark a well defined point  about 100 meters from the instrument at about instrument height  Have on hand a theodolite with all  accessories and appropriate cleaning materials     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Identify the equipment  cleaning  materials  and the point to be used for checking the horizontal collimation and the vertical crosshair     Explain that scoring will be GO or NO GO based on the proper cleaning of the instrument and the    checking of the horizontal collimation and the vertical crosshair  Tell the soldier to perform operator  maintenance on a theodolite     Performance Measures    1                  N O    A C PD         E  po      Wiped off the instrument with a clean  dry  lint free cloth       Cleaned the lenses with lens cleaning tiss
177. ield environment  given a sketch of the triangle on  Department of the Army  DA  Form 1962  the horizontal angles  HAs  and zenith distances  ZDs   measured from two known stations  the coordinates of the known stations  computation forms  the grid  azimuth and grid distance  S  between the two known points  instructions on two point intersection  computations  a scientific calculator  a desktop personal computer  PC  with the National Imagery and  Mapping Agency  NIMA  Tables Program  and blank DA Forms 1920  1938  and 1947     Standards  Compute the unknown angle  the length of the unknown sides  the northings  N  and  eastings  E  of the unknown point  and the elevation of the unknown point  Compute the triangles to one  decimal place in seconds  the sine to eight decimal places  and the distances to three decimal places   Compute the positions to two decimal places that agree to within   2 in the last decimal place  All entries  and computations must be accurate  neat  and legible     Performance Steps    1  Use the sketch of the triangle on DA Form 1962  Figure 052 260 1335 1  to label the first unknown  point as  1 and the points clockwise as unknown points  2 and  3  Complete the triangle  computation on DA Form 1920  Figures 052 260 1335 2 and 052 260 1335 3      Performance Steps           PROJECT  412 101 G 100 SPE 1 Problem  1  LOCATION  Fort Belvoir  VA    STATION    Grid zone 18S    TABULATION OF GEODETIC DATA  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent
178. if necessary     Locally reproduce the partially completed DA Form 1564 R if more than one soldier will be  evaluated on the specific task or the same soldier will be evaluated more than once     Enter the date  the evaluator s name  and the soldier s name and unit before starting the  evaluation     Enter a check in column  c   PASS  or column  d   FAIL  for each performance step evaluated  as  appropriate     Check the status block GO or NO GO     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    HANDS ON EVALUATION DATE  For use of this form  see AR 350 57  the proponent agency is ODCSOPS  TASK TITLE TASK NUMBER    ITEM PERFORMANCE STEP TITLE SCORE     Check One        B    EA L                                                                                                    EVALUATOR S NAME UNIT    SOLDIER S NAME       DA FORM 5164 R  SEP 85    EDITION OF DEC 82 IS OBSOLETE  USAPPC V2 00     gt   N    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    APPENDIX B   DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY  DA  FORM 5165 R  FIELD EXPEDIENT SQUAD    BOOK     B 1  This appendix provides a copy of an overprinted DA Form 5165 R for the tasks in this STP     B 2  Trainers should use the following instructions when completing the DA Form 5165 R that is included  in this appendix  Blank reproducible forms may be obtained in AR 350 41  All forms may be reproduced  locally on 8 1 2  by 11 inch paper     Make all entries in pencil     Enter the task number and a short title in the appropriate column or use the preprinted form  provided     Record the date in
179. ing  To be published within the next six months      References   3    STP 5 82D12 SM TG  FM 6 2 Tactics  Techniques  and Procedures for Field Artillery Survey  23  September 1993    Other Product Types  DGPS OPERATOR   S MANUAL Differential Global Positioning System  DGPS  Operator s Manual     DMS FORM 5820 R Collimation Check  1 January 1997   EM 1110 1 1002 Survey Markers and Monumentations  14 September 1990   NIMA FORM 8240 24 Theodolite Recording Sheet  1 August 1997   NIMA FORM 8900 2 Field Sheet EDME  1 June 1997   STP 21 1 5       Soldier s Manual of Common Tasks Skill Level 1  1 October 1990    Special Texts   DMS ST 005 Geometric Geodetic Accuracy Standards and Specifications for using  GPS Relative Positioning Techniques  1 July 1997   DMS ST 031 Standards and Specifications for Geodetic Control Networks  1 July  1997   DMS ST 032 Standards of Accuracy  and Specifications of Geodetic Surveys  1  October 1997   DMS ST 096 Real Time Kinematic with TrimMap Software Training Manual  1 January  1997   DMS ST 097 GPSurvey Software 2 2 Training Manual  1 January 1997   DMS ST 648 Automated Integrated Survey Instrument  AISI  Operations  1 March  1998    References   4    STP 5 82D12 SM TG  27 AUGUST 2001    By Order of the Secretary of the Army     ERIC K  SHINSEKI  General  United States Army  Chief of Staff    Official     Jt BML  JOEL B  HUDSON  Administrative Assistant to the    Secretary of the Army  0127604    DISTRIBUTION     Active Army  Army National Guard  and
180. ion     13     14     15     16     17     Compute and record the mean station angle in block 13 and check for rejection of the observed  angle  The rejection limit is   5 0 seconds from the mean  Have the instrument operator reobserve  the rejected positions  if necessary     Repeat steps 2 through 12 to obtain the explement angle and record this value in block 14  To obtain  the explement angle  the observer will sight on the forward station and turn to the rear station     Compute and record the mean explement angle in block 15 and check for rejection of the observed  angle  The rejection limit is   5 0 seconds from the mean  Have the instrument operator reobserve  the rejected positions  if necessary     Compute and record the circle closure for the combined station and explement angles in block 16  and check for rejection of the observed angle  The rejection limit is   5 0 seconds from 360    Have  the instrument operator reobserve the rejected positions  if necessary     Give NIMA Form 8240 24 to the instrument operator to check     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Select and mark three stations  The  distance between the occupied station and the target stations should be greater than 100 meters  The  station angle should be greater
181. ions from the nonreciprocal observations on                DA Form 1947     Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1920  DA FORM 1938  DA FORM 1947  DA FORM 1962    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Subject Area 2  Automated Integrated Survey Instrument    Perform Operator Maintenance on Survey Equipment  052 260 1131    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a secure field environment  given topographic survey  equipment  with all accessories and applicable technical manuals  TMs   and appropriate cleaning  materials     Standards  Perform operator maintenance on the survey equipment according to the applicable TM     Performance Steps  1  Inventory all equipment components and accessories     Wipe the dirt and dust from all components with a dry cloth     Clean all glass surfaces with lens cleaning tissue     Inspect the exterior of the equipment for damage  cracks  and wear     Ensure that the motion locks and controls rotate freely and function properly       Inspect the tribrach and the tribrach s leveling screws for damage and clean them  as required        o      A CO         Inspect the tripod  bayonet screw  and other screws and nuts for damage and clean and tighten  them  as required     8  Inspect the transport case   a  Open and remove the instrument   b  Turn the case over and shake out a
182. ipsoid      Select  INDIVIDUAL POINT       Enter the latitude      Select the option  CONVERGENCE FROM GEOGRAPHIC COORDINATES  and record the                 and C5 values in blocks 5h    i  Exit the tables program     JIQ                6  Compute the convergence      by using the following formula and record it in block 6                XIII p3   C5    where           Tabular value 12   XIII   Tabular value 13   C5   Tabular value C5         0001 times the difference in longitude or p   the difference in longitude divided by 10 000   p3   p cubed   a  Divide the result of C  which is in seconds  by 3 600 and convert the value to degrees  minutes   and seconds   b  Record the convergence to three decimal places in block 6b          156    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    7  Sign and date the form in blocks 7     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Ensure that grid coordinates are  converted to geodetic coordinates according to task 051 260 2466  if necessary     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Show him where to record the  tabular values and the convergence on the modified DA Form 1932  Tell him to compute the  convergence     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Filled in the headings on DA 
183. ite where the AISI  data was collected  Tell him to postprocess the AISI data     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Opened a project directory                    Downloaded data from the AISI                    Opened a job file for editing                 Entered the project control points                    Processed the raw data from the AISI                     Managed the processed data                     O oO       I      Displayed the processed data                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     3   167    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    References  Required Related  DMS ST 648    3   168    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Subject Area 3  Traverse    Check Horizontal Field Data  052 260 2487    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor  given a completed Department of the Army  DA  Form 1916  the  project directive  Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  031  and a scientific calculator     Standards  Check DA Form 1916 to ensure that all entries recorded during a traverse are complete   neat  legible  and correct  All entries must conform to third order specifications and the unit s standing  operating procedure  SOP   Correct any errors or omissions that are found     Performance Steps    1  Check DA Form 1916 to ensure that all entries are complete  neat  legible  and correct  in addition   check the following items   a  An i
184. ith a driver  and blank DA Form 1958 or  1959     Standards  Recover the designated station  Use the information that is provided on DA Form 1958  DA  Form 1959  or the trig list to recover  sketch  and describe the designated station s   Follow all safety  precautions     Performance Steps    1  Collect the information on the stations to be recovered   a  Locate the area where the survey control stations are on the map   b  Develop a course of action to navigate safely to the survey control station   c  Brief the driver  if necessary  on the route to be used to navigate to the station s      2  Locate the survey control station and navigate safely to it     3  Describe and make a sketch of the survey control station on DA Form 1959  or DA Form 1958  if  used   Figures 052 260 1323 1 and 052 260 1323 2      STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    TYPE OF MARK STATION         2     STAMPING ON MARK AGENCY  CAST IN MARKSI         5                          3a 7     INORTHINGI  EASTING   FT    EASTING  INORTHING          GRID AND ZONE ESTABLISHED BY  AGENCY   3a 7   M  3a 7   M   fs ee             M     TO OBTAIN GR D AZIMUTH  ADD TO THE GEODETIC AZIMUTH  TO OBTAIN GRD AZ   ADD   SUB   TO THE GEODETIC AZIMUTH    prod BACK AZIMUTH   or e e tg  GNET  METERS  METERS   FEET   WHALES            DA FORM 1959  OCT 64 REPLACES DA FORMS 1959 DESCRIPTION OR RECOVERY OF HORIZONTAL CONTROL STATION           1960  1 FEB 57  WHICH For use of this form  see      3 34 331  the proponent USAPA
185. ks     3 8    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Explain that final position  elevation  and azimuth data are not required because they will be added after  the survey is computed and adjusted  Tell him to sketch and describe the location of a survey control  station     Performance Measures    1        o         LD    Entered administrative data on DA Form 1959  or DA Form 1958 if it was used      Described the general location of the station     Described the site location of the station       Described the station       Completed the back of the form       Described any reference marks  if they were used       Made a sketch of the station in the area provided on the form     GO    NO GO    Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any    step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References    Required  DA FORM 1958  DA FORM 1959    Related    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Recover Survey Control Stations  052 260 1323    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given universal transverse Mercator  UTM   coordinates  the survey station s description on Department of the Army  DA  Form 1958 or 1959 for the  desired control point s  and or the trig list containing the desired control point s   a hand held global   positioning system  GPS  receiver  a 1 50 000 map of the area where the control point s  are located  a  plotting scale  a compass  a 30 meter tape measure  a vehicle w
186. l line  measurements are complete  neat  legible  and correct  The field notes must conform to the third order  specifications and the unit s standing operating procedure  SOP   Correct any errors or omissions that are  found     Performance Steps    1  Check DA Form 5820 to ensure that all entries are complete  neat  legible  and correct  in addition   check the following items  Note any errors or omissions   a  An index of the control points   b  A description of the level line or network       A continuous sketch of the fieldwork   d  A list of level party personnel   e  The instrument data     2  Check DA Form 5820 to ensure the accuracy of level line runs  Note any errors or omissions   Ensure that       All administrative items are entered on each page      The differences in rod intervals are three or less      The length of the sights is less than the maximum allowed      Individual backsights  BSs  and foresights  FSs  are balanced to within   10 meters      Total BSs and FSs are balanced to within   10 meters      Page checks are performed                    Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  There should be at least 2  kilometers of leveling field notes with at least three temporary benchmarks included  DA Form 5820  should be us
187. lax  to relax the rodman after the reading     5  Verify the correctness of the rod reading with the recorder   a  Ensure that the rod intercepts agree to within   0 003 meters   b  Ensure that the BS and FS sums of intervals are within 10 meters  If the difference is larger  than 10 meters  reposition the FS rod position and reobserve   c  Ensure that the BS and FS sums of all previous  sums of intervals  balance within 10 meters     6  Move the level crew to the next setup  If all reading and recording requirements have been met  the  FS rodman remains in place  Signal the rear rodman and move the instrument forward for the next  setup     7  Repeat steps 1 through 6 until the level line is complete     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Select and mark two survey points at  least 300 meters apart  The difference in elevation between the survey points must be known     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him the survey line to be  leveled  the equipment to be used  and which personnel will assist in the leveling operation  Explain that  scoring will be GO or NO GO based on the correct lengths of sight  the correct leveling of the instrument   the correct three wire and back of rod readings  and
188. line of collimation  line of sight  of a  telescope and the collimation axis of the instrument     Convergence  The degree or point at which lines of longitude merge toward the poles     Coordinates   Linear and or angular quantities  which designate the position of a point in relation to a given reference  frame  there are two general divisions of coordinates used in surveying  polar and rectangular  these may  be further subdivided into three classes  plane coordinates  spherical coordinates  and space  coordinates     Corrected distance  A measured distance that has been adjusted by computation to show its true length     Cosine  cos   In a right triangle  the ratio of the side adjacent to a given angle to the hypotenuse  the sine of the  complement of a given angle or arc     Declination   In a system of polar or spherical coordinates  the angle at the origin between a line to a point and the  equatorial plane  measured in a plane perpendicular to the equatorial plane  the arc between the equator  and the point measured on a great circle  which is perpendicular to the equator  as it relates to  astronomy  the angular distance to a body on the celestial sphere that is measured north or south through  90  from the celestial equator along the hour circle of the body  Comparable to latitude on the terrestrial  sphere and often used as a shortened term for magnetic declination     Delta easting  The difference in distance from a known point to an unknown point using distance a
189. ll entries are neat and legible                                  1  DAO    Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to check the field notes  and abstracts for errors     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Checked the field notes and the abstract entries to ensure that they were     mE  complete  neat  and legible     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Measures GO NOGO    2  Spot checked the field notes and the abstract entries to ensure that they                conformed to the unit s SOP  references  and project specifications  Noted any  errors or omissions     Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DMS ST 031  DMS ST 032    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Compute a Grid Traverse or Side Shot  SS   052 260 1235    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a secure field environment  given a sketch of a traverse on  Department of the Army  DA  Form 1962  starting and closing geodetic azimuths  all mean and corrected  station angles for the traverse  all horizontal or geodetic distances  univers
190. ll prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to convert the UTM grid  coordinates to geodetic coordinates     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Filled in the headings on DA Form 1933                    Computed and recorded the absolute values for E  and N                     Computed and recorded the value of q                    Computed and recorded the values for q2  q3  q4  95  and 96                    Determined the preliminary latitude                     Determined the actual latitude prime                      Oo    fF              Generated tabular values VII  VIII  D6  IX  X  and E5 using the NIMA Tables                Program               Computed and recorded the delta latitude                   9  Converted the delta latitude  seconds  into delta latitude  degrees  and recorded                it     10  Computed and recorded the latitude                 11  Computed and recorded the delta longitude  seconds                    12  Determined the delta longitude  degrees   converted it to DDD MMSS  and                recorded it     13  Computed and recorded the longitude                   14  Signed and dated the form                   3 145    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show hi
191. llows     Display  STD       P27 14 53  HA         317 3502                 89 5747       Select the D BAR mode with normal resolution    f  Aim the instrument at the FS in the reverse mode and press the A M button  Perform this step  four times    g  Aim the instrument at the FS in the direct mode and press the A M button  Perform this step  four times    NOTE  For later reference  this is a  Two face point     h  Check the difference in the horizontal aim  dH  and the difference in the vertical aim  dV   The   display will appear as follows     Display  D BAR     P27_14 53  HA         317 3502    dV  05  NOTE  These values are seconds from the mean  They should be below 05 for horizontal and below 10  for vertical  If the values are too high  repeat the reverse and direct pointings  If the values are still too  high  perform the collimation test   i  Press the A M button again to measure the distance  The display will appear as follows     Display  D BAR       P27 14 55                    226 2035  VA              86 5716  SD           105 319    NOTE  Count 10 cycles before pushing the REG button   j  Press the REG button  The display will appear as follows     Display  D BAR       P27 15 01   MORE    NOTE  This completes one set of measurements  BS and FS pair    k  Press the YES button to measure additional BS and FS pairs  The display will appear as  follows     Display  D BAR          P27 15 03  1 FORESIGHT  2 BACKSIGHT  3 OTHER     Enter 2 to measure the BS   m  Enter
192. m how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1933  TM 8358 1    3   146    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Convert Geodetic Coordinates to Universal Transverse Mercator  UTM  Grid Coordinates  052 260 2470    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a secure field environment  given the geodetic coordinates of a  point  a scientific calculator  a desktop personal computer  PC  with the National Imagery Mapping  Agency  NIMA  Tables Program  instructions on how to convert coordinates  Technical Manual  TM   8358 1  and Department of the Army  DA  Form 1932     Standards  Convert geodetic coordinates to UTM grid coordinates  Enter all factors to eight decimal  places  Take tabular values Il  Ill  IV  V  A6  and B5 from the appropriate spheroid tables and record them  to the same decimal places as given in the tables  Compute the final grid position to three decimal places   All entries and computations must be accurate  neat  and legible    Performance Steps    1       in the headings on DA Form 1932  Figures 052 260 2470 1 and 052 260 2470 2      3   147    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps        U T M  GRID COORDINATES FROM GEOGRAPHIC COORDINATES    For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the prponent agency is TRADOC     ORGANIZATION  UNIT FE  Meter   500 000 m           PROJECT  1a       LOCATION                 m    1a u  CENTRAL MERIDIAN  1c 2       SPHEROID        Station                             Station       e    UB            L    gt  gt   3        
193. mark  step 4g   Enter this amount to  four decimal places with the sign in block 5b    c  Compute and truncate the AE to four decimal places  Enter this amount in block 5c  For third   order specification  use the following formula     AE     0 012 meters times the square root of the distance in Km     where    Km   the length of line in kilometers  d  Compare the AE  step 5c  to the closure  step 5b    NOTE  If the numerical value of the closure is equal to or smaller than the AE  then the level line meets  third order specifications  If it does not  there is no need to continue with the computations on DA Form  1942    3 121    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    6  Compute the adjustment correction per kilometer to the nearest 0 000001 meter by dividing the  closure  step 5b  by the total length of line  step 3c  and changing the sign  Enter this amount to six    9     decimal places with the sign  round the answer  in block 6       Compute the correction to each observed elevation to the nearest 0 0001 meter by multiplying the    length of line  step 3b  of each section by the correction per kilometer  step 6   Enter this amount to    four decimal places with the sign  round the answer  in blocks 7       Compute the adjusted elevation of each benchmark to the nearest 0 001 meter by algebraically    adding the correction  step 7  to the observed elevation  steps 4f and 4g  of each station  Enter this    amount to three decimal places  round the answer  in block 8    
194. mean of the zone  boundaries     3  Grid zone where the point is located  block 1c 3    Find the longitude across the top or  bottom of the map and the latitude along the right or left side of the map  The point where  the longitude and latitude intersect is the grid zone  consisting of a number and a letter      2  Compute and record the difference in longitude   a  Compute the difference in longitude by using the following formula     Difference in longitude   longitude   CM    b  Record the absolute value in degrees  minutes  and seconds  DDD MMSS  in block 2b  The  absolute value is always positive    c  Convert the difference in longitude to seconds by changing the value to decimal degrees then  multiplying that value by 3 600  Record the value to three decimal places in block 2c     3  Compute the p value by using the following formula and record it to eight decimal places in block 3           0001 times the difference in longitude  in seconds  or p   the difference in longitude  in  seconds  divided by 10 000     4  Compute the values of p squared  p2  and p cubed  p3  and record them in blocks 4 to eight decimal  places     5  Generate tabular values XII  XIII  and C5 using the NIMA Tables Program for the appropriate  ellipsoid  The given latitude is the argument used  Record the values to the number of decimal  places generated by the program      Enter the tables program      Enter any letter      Select  LONG PROMPTS       Input the station name      Select the ell
195. meet the rejection limits     9  Complete the data on the target shown on DA Form 1943   a  Enter the date and the name of the station to which you are showing a target on DA Form 1943  in blocks 9a   b  Draw a sketch of the target shown on DA Form 1943 in block 9b and indicate the points and  heights that were measured   c  Date  name  and label the sketch of a target on DA Form 1943 in blocks 9c if more than one  target is shown to a station or if a target is shown to another station     10  Sign and date DA Form 1943 in blocks 10     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to abstract VAs ZDs   Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Filled out the headings on DA Form 1943           2  Abstracted the times  for reciprocal angles only  and the date from DA Form 5817                3  Abstracted the height of the object above the station  only for reciprocal angles                     occupiable targets  from DA Form 5817     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Measures GO NOGO    4  Abstracted the HI  t  above the station from DA Form 5817  Entered the height to                the nearest millimeter on DA Form 1943       Computed and entered the t o on DA Form 1943  
196. ment Training Frequency Codes    Sustainment Training SL Column  This column lists the SLs of the MOS for which soldiers must  receive sustainment training to ensure they maintain proficiency to SM standards     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    2 2  Subject Area Codes     Skill Level 1  1 General  2 Automated Integrated Survey Instrument  3 Traverse  4 Level  5 Differential Global Positioning System  Skill Level 2  1 General  2 Automated Integrated Survey Instrument  3 Traverse  4 Level  5 Differential Global Positioning System    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    2 3  Duty Position Training Requirements     2 4  Critical Tasks List     Subject  Area    Task Number    MOS TRAINING PLAN  82D12    CRITICAL TASKS    Title    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Trainin Sust  Tng  9   Freq  Locatio  n    Sust  Tng  SL    Skill Level 1    1  General    2   Automated  Integrated  Survey  Instrument    3  Traverse    052 260 1116    052 260 1213    052 260 1323    052 260 1333    052 260 1335    052 260 1131    052 260 1134    052 260 1336    052 260 1337    052 260 1338    052 260 1122    052 260 1225    052 260 1226    052 260 1227    052 260 1234    052 260 1235    052 260 1236       Emplace a Permanent Survey Control Point    Sketch and Describe the Location of a Survey  Control Station    Recover Survey Control Stations    Perform a Topographic Survey by the Stadia   Transit Method    Compute an Intersection    Perform Operator Maintenance on Survey  Equipment    Operate the Automated Integrated Surveying  Instrument 
197. ment is one that is manufactured by the survey party in a base camp rear  area and transported to the station site  Construct monuments according to standing operating  procedures  SOPs  and the project directive  Once the monuments are formed and cured  they are  emplaced in the same manner as commercially manufactured  nonmetallic ones   2  Do not use brass or bronze survey disks or markers stamped  CORPS OF ENGINEERS  U S  ARMY   outside the United States  US  unless they have been approved by the host nation    b  Construct on site concrete monuments     1  Dig a hole 1 to 1 5 meters deep  to extend below the frost line   The width of the hole will  be about 30 centimeters wide  A hole any wider requires more concrete  Go to step 3b 6   if a subsurface marker is not required     2  Dig an additional 10 centimeters and fill the extension with concrete for subsurface  markers  see Note 3      3  Insert a prestamped survey marker or disk  see Note 2      4  Set up a plumb bench and plumb over the marker     5  Cover the subsurface point with a thin board for protection and backfill the hole with 5 to 7  centimeters of soil     6  Enlarge the hole at the bottom about 5 centimeters in radius  tapering upward for about 30  centimeters     7  Construct the top form     8  Pour and tamp the concrete into the hole until it is 15 centimeters from the top  see Note  3      9  Put the form on top of the hole  Fill and tamp the form with concrete     10  Level off the concrete with th
198. n  The  rear station is the azimuth control station and the forward station is the second traverse station  On the  next computation  the first forward station becomes the occupied station and the other stations change  accordingly   d  Record the latitude and longitude of the occupied station and the geodetic distance from the  occupied station to the forward station in blocks 1d to three decimal places with the sign   e  Record the geodetic azimuth from the occupied station to the rear station in block 1e to one  decimal place   f  Record the angle at the occupied station in block 1f to one decimal place  Cross out the  preprinted plus or minus sign   NOTE  On the preliminary computations  use the observed field angles  On the final computation  use the  adjusted field angles from the azimuth closure and adjustment computations   g  Compute the forward azimuth  Add the angle at the occupied station to the azimuth for the rear  station  If the sum exceeds 360    subtract 360   and record it in block 1g to one decimal place   h  Record the sine and cosine of the forward azimuth in blocks 1h to seven decimal places with  the sign     Compute X  difference applied to longitude  using the following formula and record it in block 11  to three decimal places with the sign     X   geodetic distance x sine of the forward azimuth   j  Compute Y  difference applied to latitude  using the following formula and record it in block 1j to  three decimal places with the sign     Y   geodeti
199. n in  relation to major landmarks  cities  and cultural or man made features  Use the following phrase   The station is located          3  Describe the site location of the station  block 3   Give the location of the station by using a magnetic  compass and tape measure  The description will be referenced to the station s reference marks      to  prominent durable features such as a road intersection or a building  for example  30 meters at an  azimuth of 45   from the intersection of Main Street and Elm Road   Use the following phrase  The  station is located          4  Describe the station  block 4   Give a description of the station in terms of material used  the  configuration and stamping on the mark  the height of the mark in reference to ground level  and  whether or not the mark has a subsurface monument  Use the following phrase  The station is  marked by a          5  Describe any reference marks and include the following  block 5    NOTE  This is not necessary if a reference mark is not present       A reference mark description   b  A magnetic azimuth from the main station to the reference mark       The distance from the main station to the reference mark  Measure to the nearest 1 centimeter   d  An azimuth and approximate distance to any prominent points that may assist in locating the  station     6  Make a sketch of the station in the area provided on the form and include the following  block 6    a  The orientation of the station in reference to north   b  
200. nd a false northing of zero  A scale reduction  factor of 0 9996 is used on all zones  Zones for the southern hemisphere are identical to their northern  counterpart except that the false northing is set to 10 000 000 to eliminate negative Y coordinates     Vertical control  The survey control points for which the elevation of the point has been determined by leveling     Zenith distance  The vertical angle between the zenith and the object which is observed or defined     Glossary   13    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    REFERENCES    Department of Army Pamphlets    DA PAM 350 59  DA PAM 738 750    DA PAM 738 751    Field Manuals  FM 3 34 230    Other Product Types  SP 241    Special Texts  DMS ST 045    Technical Manuals  TM 5 6675 329 13 amp P    Department of Army Forms  DA FORM 1916  DA FORM 1920  DA FORM 1923    DA FORM 1932  DA FORM 1933  DA FORM 1934    DA FORM 1938  DA FORM 1940    DA FORM 1942  DA FORM 1943  DA FORM 1947    DA FORM 1958  DA FORM 1959  DA FORM 1962  DA FORM 2404  DA FORM 5817  DA FORM 5818  DA FORM 5819  DA FORM 5820    Army Correspondence Course Program Catalog  1 October 2000    Functional Users Manual for The Army Maintenance Management  System  TAMMS   1 August 1994    Functional Users Manual for the Army Maintenance Management  System   Aviation  TAMMS A   15 March 1999    Topographic Operations  3 August 2000    Natural Tables for the Computation of Geodetic Positions  Clarke  Spheroid of 1866    UTM Grid Tables Clarke 1866  Vol   and Il  1 April 2000    O
201. nd azimuth to  determine it  in an east west line     Direct reading  The reading of the horizontal or vertical circle of a theodolite or engineer transit with the telescope in the  direct position  In field notes  a direct reading is indicated with a letter D preceding the observed value     Distance angle  An angle in a triangle opposite a side used as a base in the solution of the triangle or a side whose length  is to be computed     Distance  horizontal   The distance measured in a horizontal plane  as distinguished from a distance measured on a slope   Horizontal distance refers primarily to taped distances or to distances reduced to horizontal by  computations     Eccentric station   A survey point which is offset from the station it represents due to a lack of visibility at the real station or  due to other obstacles making it impractical to occupy  An adjustment is always computed to correct for  this offset     Electronic distance measuring equipment  EDME     Glossary   10    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Any measuring device which employs electronics to measure distances  such as microwave and infrared     Elevation  Vertical distance from a datum  usually mean sea level  to a point or object on the earth s surface  Not to  be confused with altitude which refers to points or objects above the earth s surface     Error   1  The difference between an observed value and the true value of a quantity  2  A class of small  inaccuracies due to imperfections in equipment or techni
202. nd describe the designated station without error  showing its location on DA Form  1958 or 1959  The description must be clear and concise     Performance Steps    1  Enter administrative data on DA Form 1959  or DA Form 1958  if needed   Figures 052 260 1213 1  and 052 260 1213 2      STP 5 82D12 SM TG  Performance Steps    COUNTRY TYPE OF MARK STATION    la 1b    LOCALITY STAMPING ON MARK AGENCY  CAST IN MARKS  ELEVATION  FT   Id le 1f lg  M     LATITUDE  g lg    INORTHING   EASTING           EASTING   NORTHING   FT    GRID AND ZONE ESTABLISHED BY  AGENCY   1g          M         NORTHING   EASTING            EASTING   NORTHING   FT   GRID        ZONE DATE ORDER   M   M     GRIO AZIMUTH  ADD o TO THE GEODETIC AZIMUTH  GRIO AZ   ADD   SUB   o 5 TO THE GEODETIC AZIMUTH    AZIMUTH OR DIRECTION  IGEODETICHGRIO  BACK AZIMUTH GECO  DISTANCE        DISTANCE  AGNETIC  METERS   FEET   METERS   FEET           DA FORM 1959  OCT 64 REPLACES DA FORMS 1959 DESCRIPTION OR RECOVERY OF HORIZONTAL CONTROL STATION    AND 1960  1 FEB 57  WHICH For use of this form  see FM3 34 331  the proponent     uSAPA V1 00  ARE OBSOLETE  agency is TRADOC     Figure 052 260 1213 1  Sample of DA Form 1959 With Block Numbers    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps       NOTES ON COMPLETION OF FORM    1  GENERAL  This form may be used in the field or  as  an office form to record and publish positions   descriptions  and related data     2  FIELD USE OF FORM  The information required  should be obtained and r
203. nd nuts for damage and                cleaned and tightened them  if it was required     8  Inspected the transport case                 9  Stored the equipment in its transport case                   10  Notified the supervisor of any uncorrectable faults                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  TM 5 6675 332 10    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Operate the Automated Integrated Surveying Instrument  AISI   052 260 1134    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given a complete AISI set  a survey station  to set up over  a tripod  a plumb bob  a 2 meter tape measure  two visible survey stations with targets   and the AISI operator s manual     Standards  Operate the AISI  Measure the horizontal and vertical directions to both targets to the nearest  second  measure the distances to the nearest millimeter  perform calibration checks  and properly take  down and secure the instrument  The tripod must provide a stable setup and allow the operator to  measure angles without straddling the legs  The tripod head must be horizontal and the legs must be set  in relation to the terrain  The instrument must be plumb to   2 millimeters of the station mark     Performance Steps    1  Set up and plumb the instrument over the designated point    a  Open the tripod and  with the cover
204. ndependent computations  Compare the final position and elevation to ensure that they are  correct     Performance Steps  NOTE  Figure 052 260 2491 1 is a sample of the three forms together for easier handling in the field     1  Ensure that administrative and field data are entered correctly on the following forms   a  DA Form 1920  Figure 052 260 2491 1      3   160    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  PROJECT  Example       pd Ratio  side sine 4844 15                  TWO POINT INTERSECTION   OBSTRUCTION COMPUTATION                                       ow   156  34 32 0    a   336  34 32 0    Ea  2  07  00 9          609532 5     0 854390566            238 41 32 9        swoen    0 994552512          275  58 59 5      ze      0 519631370   a            5    1 1    Oman    0 104236753                                  469533 340          7190738450   3              E    470700 070   3605 509   AN    500 167   S   45838           4772 239          1   465927 831          7191238617  1   ANTI  E    465927 831       __    t2to1   2t03 22        t3t01  t3t02  23     I                5716 2   275  59  64  51   0 4290  4798 378     00  25 50 2           h  h    s e tan 90   C  x  xin secs     0 5    m s    Part III  DA Form 1947    COMPUTED BY DATE CHECKED BY DATE  SSG BAKER 20010818    Figure 052 260 2491  1  Completed Sample of DA Forms 1920  1938  and 1947     1  Station names    2  Observed angles    b  DA Form 1938  Figure 052 260 2491 1     1  Grid azimuths     3   16
205. ndex of the control points   b  A description of the network       A sketch of the work completed   d  A list of the survey party personnel   e  The instrument data     2  Check DA Form 1916 to ensure the accuracy of angles turned and that      All administrative items are entered on each page     The observer and recorder blocks are complete and accurate     The project name and organization blocks are complete and accurate     The height of instrument  HI   height of target  HT   eccentricity  and instrument target numbers  are complete and accurate   e  Any circle settings are correct   f  The sums and means are accurately computed   g  The concluded angle is computed and entered for each position turned   h  The mean angle is computed and entered      j  k  l   m                    The closure specifications are met      All entries are accurate      All measurements meet project requirements   Any errors and or omissions are noted   All entries are neat and legible     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  The project directive should make  reference to third order specifications     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to check the horizontal  field data     Performance Measures GO NOGO    
206. ng System   DGPS  Data    Adjust Differential Global Positioning System   DGPS  Networks       STP 5 82D12 SM TG    CHAPTER 3    MOS Skill Level Tasks    Skill Level 1  Subject Area 1  General    Emplace a Permanent Survey Control Point  052 260 1116    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given all the required tools and supplies for  the type of monument to be emplaced or marked     Standards  Emplace a permanent survey control point so that it cannot be destroyed or moved  Make the  monument out of concrete and establish an azimuth or a reference mark or a witness post as required by  the survey project work order     Performance Steps    1  Select the tools that are needed for the monument to be emplaced or marked   NOTE  The survey party chief will select the type of monument to be emplaced or marked  While most  peacetime project directives specify and fund for a specific monument  there is no standard type of  monument required in a combat zone  However  there are several types of locally fabricated or  commercially procured monuments that are considered standard based on the location of the zone of  operations  Therefore  a knowledge of these types of monuments and their proper  construction installation is needed for this task     2  Position the survey control point so that it cannot be destroyed or moved     3  Emplace the survey monument   NOTE  Only one type of monument should be selected for demonstration  However  each soldier must  kno
207. nistrative data and list the traverse stations in order from first to last in blocks 3a   NOTE  Before beginning this adjustment  recompute the azimuth check as in the azimuth closure  computation  step 2c  by using the last  final computation  back azimuth and adjusted field angles  step  2i   If the computed forward azimuth to the azimuth mark from the last traverse station does not exactly  match the fixed azimuth  then the computations are invalid because of a math error    b  List the geodetic distance of each leg next to the forward station of that leg in block 3b    c  Record the known latitude and longitude of the starting and ending traverse stations in blocks   3c    d  List the difference in latitude and the difference in longitude in seconds for each leg  obtained   from DA Form 1923  final position computations   in blocks 3d   NOTE  All differences  errors  and corrections require an algebraic sign    e  Sum the distances and record this value in block 3e    f  Algebraically sum the difference in latitude and the difference in longitude and record these   values in blocks 3f with the sign    g  Compute the fixed difference in latitude and longitude for the traverse using the following   formulas  Convert the difference for latitude and longitude to seconds and record these values  in blocks 3g with the sign     Fixed difference in latitude   the latitude of the ending station   the latitude of the starting  station     Fixed difference in longitude   the longitu
208. nstruction Part Number 571146152  NSN 6675 01 371  4961  30  June 1994   TM 8358 1 Datums  Ellipsoids  Grids  and Grid Reference Systems  20 September  1990    Related Publications    Related publications are sources of additional information  They are not required in order to understand  this publication     Department of Army Forms    DA FORM 1934 Grid Azimuths  t and T  and  t   T  Correction from UTM Grid Coordinates   This item is included on EM 0001  1 February 1957  DA FORM 1959 Description or Recovery of Horizontal Control Station  1 July 2001    References   2    Other Product Types  EM 1110 1 1002    Special Texts  DMS ST 031    DMS ST 648    Technical Manuals  TM 5 6675 332 10    Army Regulations  AR 350 57  AR 614 200    Department of Army Forms  DA FORM 1916  DA FORM 1920  DA FORM 1932  DA FORM 1933  DA FORM 1934    DA FORM 1938  DA FORM 1940    DA FORM 1942  DA FORM 1943  DA FORM 1947    DA FORM 1958  DA FORM 1962  DA FORM 2404  DA FORM 5164 R  DA FORM 5165 R  DA FORM 5817  DA FORM 5818  DA FORM 5819  DA FORM 5820    Field Manuals  FM 25 100   FM 25 101   FM 25 4   FM 25 5   FM 3 34 311    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Survey Markers and Monumentations  14 September 1990    Standards and Specifications for Geodetic Control Networks  1 July  1997    Automated Integrated Survey Instrument  AISI  Operations  1 March  1998    Operator s Manual  Automated Integrated Survey Instrument  AISI   Type     Topographic Part Number 571146150  NSN 6675 01  372  0047  Type  Il  Constru
209. nsure that the plumb bob is still  plumb over the survey mark  If it is not  repeat steps 2a through c     4  Remove the tripod cover and attach the AISI to the tripod     5  Move the AISI on the head of the tripod to bring the plumb bob directly over the survey  mark  The base of the AISI will not overhang the tripod head  Firmly tighten the AISI to the  tripod     6  Ensure that the internal battery is fully charged and attached to the AISI  If it is not  attached to the AISI  attach it under the eyepiece     7  Level the tribrach s bull s eye bubble    b  Level the instrument using the dual axis compensator     1  Remove the lens cover and eyepiece cover     2  Place the face of the instrument parallel to the two foot screws     3  Press the PWR button on the lower left corner of the AISI  The instrument will  automatically go to the  coarse level  mode  If a message to continue appears  answer  NO by pressing the NO button     4  Level both bubbles by using the left thumb rule to adjust the front two foot screws for the  lower bubble and the rear foot screw for the upper bubble  Rotate the instrument 180       5  Press the angle measure  A M  button on the rear of the instrument  The instrument will  beep  About 5 seconds later  the instrument will beep twice  Rotate the instrument 180    again until the display reads  Press A M      6  Press the A M button on the front of the instrument     7  Enter the values for temperature  pressure  offset  and horizontal angle refer
210. nt is in the tracking  TRK  mode or the D BAR  mode  press the STD button     17  Sight in on the target as soon as the measuring beam acquires the prism  The AISI  displays the slope distance  SD  in addition to the HA and vertical angle  VA   To see the  display of N  E  and elevation  ELEV    press the ENT button before pressing the REG  button  The N  E  and ELEV are not stored in the job file     18  Press the REG button to store data  If measuring in the STD mode  it will be necessary to  press the A M button to start the measurement of the distance     NOTE  The AISI will increment to the next PNO after pressing the REG button  To change any data such  as the PNO  P CODE  and TH before data registration  use the following function  F  buttons  F5   PNO   F4   P CODE  and F6   TH      19  Press the ENT button     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps   20  Change the P CODE and the TH  if necessary    21  Aim the instrument at the next point    22  Press the REG button once and the SD is displayed on the bottom of the display    23  Repeat steps 2e 14  through  18  for additional measurements   NOTE  Shoot the BS at the end of each setup for a check  The final HA must be recorded on the  recording sheet     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can
211. ny loose dust and dirt   c  Check the exterior for damage   d  Clean the case  as required     9  Store the equipment in its transport case     10  Notify the supervisor of any uncorrectable faults     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that listed in the conditions  statement  The evaluator will prepare the area and equipment in advance to ensure that the task  standards can be met  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing  Identify the survey equipment  automated integrated  surveying instrument  AISI   level  global positioning system  GPS  receiver  and so forth   accessories   and cleaning materials to be maintained  Tell him to perform operator maintenance on survey equipment     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Inventoried all the equipment components and accessories                    Wiped the dirt and dust from all components with a clean dry cloth                    Cleaned all glass surfaces with lens cleaning tissue                     Inspected the exterior of the equipment for damage  cracks  and wear                   a A              Ensured that the motion locks and controls rotated freely and functioned properly                     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Measures GO NOGO    6  Inspected the tribrach and the tribrach s leveling screws for damage and cleaned                them  if it was required     7  Inspected the tripod  bayonet screw  and other screws a
212. o the next station     5  Make the observation measurements at the forward station     a     b      d       f  g  h  i   j     Press the PWR button to turn the AISI on  The  CONTINUE  YES NO   prompt will appear       Press the NO button     Level the electronic level and press the A M button for level calibration     Enter the temperature and pressure     Press the PRG button and enter 27       Enter 2 to continue the traverse     Aim the AISI at the BS and press the A M button     Press the A M button to measure the distance back to the BS  if required     Press the REG button once the distances are measured   Press the YES button at the  MORE   prompt and press the YES button  The display will  appear as follows     Display  STD        15 23  1   FORESIGHT   2   BACKSIGHT   3   OTHER      Repeat all of step 3     Press the YES button at the  MORE   prompt if shooting side shots  SSs      6  Make the SS observations and continue the traverse     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    a           _ 7                 Enter 3 to select  OTHER   The display will appear as follows   Display  STD            15 23  1   FORESIGHT  2   BACKSIGHT  3   OTHER    Enter 3 for the SSs     Enter SS at the  ACTIVE   prompt     Enter the PNO  P CODE  and TH     Aim the AISI at the point and press the A M button     Press the REG button and the  MORE   prompt will be displayed     Press the YES button for more SSs or multiple measurements for the same object     Press the NO button at the 
213. of curvature  r  from the following formula  The values R and N are    obtained from the NIMA Tables Program   r   RN divided by  R sin2  alpha      N cos2  alpha       where    R   Radius of curvature in the plane of the meridian   N   Radius of curvature in the plane of the prime vertical      1  Enter the NIMA Tables Program     2  Type any letter from a to z to continue the program     3  Select the  LONG PROMPTS  option     4  Enter the station name     5  Select the ellipsoid     6  Select the  INDIVIDUAL POINT  option     7  Enter the latitude of the station in the degrees  minutes  and seconds  DDD MMSS  format   for example  38 41 00      8  Select the  RADIUS OF CURVATURE IN THE MERIDIAN  N  AND PRIME VERTICAL   R  VALUES  option  The N and R values will be displayed on the top of the screen     9  Exit the program and enter 99 twice then 0 at the prompts       Compute the rho  detonated by  p   sine of 1  and enter it in block 3k     Compute k in seconds from the following formula and enter it in block 3l     k in seconds    0 5 m s divided by the value  p sine of 1      where    S   Slope distance  m   Mean coefficient of refraction  when this is not observed  use 0 4290        Compute  90     21   k  and enter it in block 3m     where    21   Zenith distance        A factor that takes in consideration of refraction and the curvature of the earth       Compute the tangent  tan  of  90    21  k  and enter it in block 3n     where           Zenith distance   K  A fa
214. of the D and R readings  The result must equal 120 0  60 0  or 0 00  seconds  blocks 5e     Record the observed ZD in blocks 5f  The ZD is the degrees  minutes  and corrected seconds  for the D reading    Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each position     6  Record the time the observer completed the observations in blocks 6  if necessary     7  Determine the mean VA ZD  Sum and mean the set of observations and enter this amount in block    T     8  Give the form to the instrument operator to check     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Select and mark two stations  The  distance between the stations should be greater than 100 meters   There should be a noticeable  difference in elevation   The instrument will be set up according to task 052 260 1134 and the target will  be set up according to task 052 260 1122  Obtain the help of an instrument operator who is qualified  according to task 052 260 1134  Measure the HT and HI     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Show him the station to be  occupied and the station to be observed  Tell him how many repetitions will be recorded  Give him the HT  and HI  Tell him to record VAs ZDs for theodolites     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Entered
215. of the error    h  Compute the corrections for each individual station and record this sum in block 2h  The sum of  the corrections must exactly equal the error but have the opposite sign  When the error is not  evenly divisible by the number of stations  the larger corrections are applied to the larger angles  for uniformity    i  Compute the adjusted field angles  Algebraically combine the corrections to the observed field  angles and record this value in block 2i to one decimal place     j  Sign and date the form in blocks 2j   NOTE  These adjusted field angles are now used in the final set of position computations on DA Form  1923 instead of the observed field angles  Label a new DA Form 1923 as  final  and repeat step 1     3  Compute the position closure and adjustment on DA Form 1962  Figures 052 260 2490 6 and 052   260 2490 7           183    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps             TABULATION OF GEODETIC DATA   For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC   LOCATION ORGANIZATION  3a 3a    B    e                  3r      Sample  cael    EE    1     gt  BY DATE                    CHECKED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD   t 3t    DA FORM 1962  FEB 57 EDITION OF FEB 57 IS OBSOLETE  USAPA V1 01                 Figure 052 260 2490 6  Sample of DA Form 1962 With Block Numbers    3 184    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    See TABULATION OF GEODETIC DATA  P For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC   LOCATION ORGANIZAT
216. on closure  A control point that determines horizontal positions only  with respect to parallels and meridians or to  other lines of reference     Horizontal control  The survey control points on which the horizontal coordinates have been determined  The coordinates  may be either geographic  latitude and longitude  or grid     Interpolate  To estimate or find an intermediate value by use of computation     Latitude  The angular distance for a specific spot on the earth s surface from 0   to 90   north or south of the  equator     Line of sight    Glossary   11    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    The straight line between two points  this line is in the direction of a great circle but does not follow the  curvature of the earth   also  the line extending from an instrument along which distance objects are seen  when viewed with a telescope or another sighting device     Longitude  The angular distance for a specific spot on the earth s surface from 0   to 90   north or south of the  Equator     micrometer  A precision instrument used for measuring the thickness of the plate and blanket     Occupied station  A traverse or triangulation station over which a theodolite or an engineer transit is set up for the  measurement of angles  Also  a station at which angles have been measured     OPORD  operation order   A directive issued by a commander to subordinate commanders for the purpose of effecting the  coordinated execution of a plan of action           0001 times the difference in longitu
217. ongitude error distance squared    n  Compute the ratio of closure  RC  using the following formula and record it in block 3n     RC   1 length of the traverse divided by the LEC  for example 1 10 000      3   186    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps      Compute the allowable error  AE  of the position closure and record it in block 30  The LEC  must be less than the LEC for the traverse to meet specifications  If the traverse does not meet  specifications  no further computations are required   NOTE  Refer to DMS ST 031 for the required accuracy specifications and formulas   p  Compute the correction in latitude per meter using the following formula and record this value in  block 3p to eight decimal places with the sign     Correction      latitude error arc  divided by  total length of the traverse    NOTE  The sign will always be opposite the sign of the error   q  Compute the latitude correction per station using the following formula and record it in blocks  3q with the sign     Correction per station    correction of latitude per meter  x  length of the traverse leg    NOTE  After all corrections are recorded  sum the column  The sum of the correction must equal the  error  arc  with the opposite sign  If  because of round off errors  the sum does not exactly equal the error   arc   the difference must be distributed  For uniformity  the largest corrections are changed by one in the  third decimal place until the correct sum is obtained    r  Compute the adjusted
218. oper operation      Inspect the reticle for smooth operation      Inspect the telescope s focusing mechanism for smooth operation                    6  Test the horizontal and vertical collimation  Test the horizontal and vertical collimation according to  task 051 260 1134 or the appropriate TM     7  Inspect the battery and connection accessories  if appropriate   a  Inspect the battery for damage   b  Inspect all electrical contacts for loose connections or corrosion   c  Inspect the connecting cables for insecure or damaged plugs and cracked or frayed insulation     8  Adjust the plate level  if needed   a  Bring the plate level to as near center as possible   b  Correct one half of the bubble error by turning the foot screw   c  Turn the plate level to correct the other half of the error using an adjustment pin     3   129    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  d  Repeat steps 8a through 8c until the plate bubble remains centered regardless of the position    9     the theodolite is traversed     Adjust the circular level  if needed   a  Level the theodolite     NOTE  Level the theodolite using the fine tune electronic compensator or the plate level  as applicable   b  Adjust the three leveling foot screws to bring the bubble to center if the circular level bubble is    10     11   12     not centered in the vial     Adjust the optical plumb  if needed     a  Set up the instrument according to task 051 260 1134 or the appropriate TM     b  Observe the station point t
219. or transfer  Select the  ADD ALL  option or highlight each file individually and  select the  ADD  option   b  Select the  TRANSFER  option   NOTE  At this point a file transfer message box will appear displaying the transfer progress     6  Disconnect the DGPS receiver   a  Select the  DISCONNECT  option when all of the required files have been transferred from the  receiver   b  Attach the next receiver to the computer and repeat steps 1 through 5   c  Select the  CLOSE  option after the last receiver has been downloaded   d  Disconnect the receiver PC cables and properly store the DGPS receiver          194    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to download data from the  DGPS receiver     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1             Prepared the DGPS receiver for downloading                   2  Started the DGPS downloading program on the PC                 3   4    Checked and configured the DGPS downloading program                     Established the connection between the DGPS receiver and the PC with the                  DGPS processing program       Transferred the DGPS data                     Disconnected the DGPS receiver
220. or will obtain a set of  intersection field notes for a single intersection computation  The evaluator will have a sample sheet with  all the errors identified     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell the soldier to check the  intersection computations  Use third order specifications     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Ensured that administrative and field data were entered correctly on DA Forms             1920  1938  and 1947     2  Checked all computations on the forms                   3  162    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Measures GO NOGO  3  Ensured that the computed positions and elevations were true and correct                   4  Ensured that each form was signed and dated                Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1920  DA FORM 1938  DA FORM 1947  DMS ST 031         163    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Establish a Declination Station  052 260 2492    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given  tables of organization and  equipment  TOE   survey equipment for a survey team  a survey control point with known starting  coordinates  known coordinates for a second survey control point or azimuth mark  a coordinate scale  a  protractor  a standard 1 50 000 scale military map  a scientific calculator  Departm
221. ordingly     NCOES PLDC USASMA  High school  College  T schools   GED SED diplom _____          A goal  troop assignments often preclude off duty education   Drill Sergeant School  Other schools Recruiting School Battle Staff Course  1SG Course       CMF 81 staff assignments  Operations intelligence sergeant  Instructor    Encouraged Recruiter drill sergeant  assignments Training developer writer  mu D me exc umen uuum De Due  assignments Surveyor Squad Leader   Section Leader   Section Leader 1SG CSM  PVT  PFC 1SG SGM  Rank SPC  CPL MSG CSM               1622   zo          Figure 1 1  Career Map  Career Management Field  CMF  81    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    SKILL PROGRESSION CHART    1 11  Similar or related education  training  and experience are grouped into CMFs  The career   progression path for MOS 82D  CMF 81  Topographic Surveyor  is shown in Figure 1 2     E9 00250  CSM  SL5 81250    E8 through 29 Senior topographic operations SGT  1SG       SL 4 82D40   E7  Section leader  Senior survey operations SGT     E6  Squad leader  SL 2 82D20   E5  Topographic survey SGT    Survey operations SGT  SL 1    82D10   E1 through E4  Topographic surveyor    Trainee    Figure 1 2  Career Progression Sequence for General Engineering  CMF 81                 STP 5 82D12 SM TG    CHAPTER 2    Training Guide    2 1  General  The MOS Training Plan  MTP  identifies the essential components of a unit training plan  for individual training  Units have different training needs and requirements bas
222. perator s  Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual  Including Repair Parts and Special Tools for Self Leveling Surveying  Level  Wild Heerbrugg Model NA2 80   NSN 6675 01 101 4724   25  February 1982     Abstract of Horizontal Directions  1 February 1957  Triangle Computation  for calculating machine   1 February 1957    Position Computation   Order Triangulation  for calculating machine  computations   1 February 1957    UTM Grid Coordinates From Geographic Coordinates  1 February 1957  Geographic Coordinates From UTM Grid Coordinates  1 July 2001    Grid Azimuths  t and T  and  t   T  Correction from UTM Grid Coordinates   This item is included on EM 0001  1 February 1957    Position Computation  UTM Grid   1 February 1957    Traverse Computation on the Universal Transverse Mercator Grid  1  February 1957    Computation of Levels  1 May 2001  Abstract of Zenith Distances  1 July 2001    Computation of Elevations from Nonreciprocal Observations  by  calculating machine   1 February 1957    Description or Recovery of Bench Mark  1 October 1964  Description or Recovery of Horizontal Control Station  1 July 2001  Tabulation of Geodetic Data  1 February 1957   Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet  1 April 1979  Zenith Distance Vertical Angle 1 June 2001   General Survey Notes  1 July 2001   Field Sheet  Infrared  1 June 2001   Three Wire Leveling  1 July 2001    References   1    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Field Manuals    FM 6 2 Tactics  Techniques  and Procedu
223. place  Divide this amount by 2 to determine the mean and  record it to one decimal place      The sum and mean of the temperature  blocks 3f   To determine the sum  add the temperature  at the instrument station with the temperature at the reflector station and record it to one  decimal place  Divide the amount by 2 to determine the mean and record it to one decimal  place          4  Enter the required distance measurements as they are made in blocks 4   5  Determine and record the sum and mean slope distance for the readings in blocks 5     6  Ensure that all entries are legible     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Select and mark two intervisible  survey stations at least 400 meters apart  The evaluator may serve as the instrument operator and  for  recording purposes  will provide the necessary headings and meteorological data to the soldier being  tested     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to record EDME values     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Recorded administrative data on DA Form 5819                 2  Read and recorded meteorological data                   3  Recorded the HI above the station  the height of reflector above the station  and                the eccentricities
224. ques  surrounding conditions  or human  limitations  not to be confused with blunders or mistakes     Explement angle  An angle measured from the forward observed station to the rear observed station in a clockwise manner     Foresight  FS    An observation of the distance and direction to the next instrument station  In traversing  a foresight is a  point set ahead to be used for reference when resetting the transit or line or when verifying the alignment   In leveling  a foresight is the reading on a rod that is held at a point whose elevation is to be determined     Forward station  The station being observed  such as in a traverse  which would be the next station occupied as work  progresses     Geodetic distance  The distance between two points obtained by computations and adjusted by a scale factor to mean sea  level     Grid coordinates  A network of uniformly spaced horizontal and perpendicular lines  as for locating points on a map      Grid distance  The distance between two points obtained by computations from grid coordinates of the points     Height of instrument   In spirit leveling  it is the height of the line of sight of a leveling instrument above the adopted datum  In  stadia surveying  it is the height of the center of the telescope  horizontal axis  of the transit or telescopic  alidade above the ground or station mark  In trigonometric leveling  it is the height of the center of the  theodolite  horizontal axis  above the ground or station mark     Horiz
225. r  section from the field notes  Enter these amounts to four decimal places with the sign in blocks  4a  in their respective running directions     b  Compute the DE between the forward and backward runs per section and enter this amount to  four decimal places as an absolute value  no sign  in block 4b    c  Determine the mean DE by computing the absolute mean of the forward and backward DE   Enter the mean DE with the sign of the forward run to four decimal places  round the answers   in block 4c    d  Enter the known elevation of the beginning benchmark in block 4d    e  Enter the known elevation of the ending benchmark in block 4e    f  Compute the observed elevation by algebraically adding the mean DE  step 4c  and the known  elevation of the beginning benchmark  step 4d   Enter this amount to four decimal places in  block 4f    g  Compute each successive observed elevation by algebraically adding the respective section s  mean DE to the preceding elevation  step 4f   Enter this amount to four decimal places in block  4g    NOTE  The last entry will be the observed elevation of the ending benchmark  which must be compared  to the fixed ending elevation     5  Compute and enter the EC and the allowable error  AE  to the nearest 0 0001 meter    a  Enter the known elevation of the ending benchmark  from step 4e  in block 5a    b  Compute the closure by subtracting the known elevation of the ending benchmark  step 5a   from the computed observed elevation of the ending bench
226. rea provided on the form and include the following  block  3d      1  The orientation of the station in reference to north     2  An adequate coverage area that includes several referenced objects     3  Any other marks  in addition to the described reference marks  that may assist in the  station s location  such as trees  fence lines  roads  sidewalks  or structures     4  A quantifiable description for the referenced marks  for example  use the tree type and  dimension  road width  building size  and so forth     e  Complete the back of the form with the following    1  The name of the individual completing the form  block      1       b     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps   2  The project designation  block      2      3  The date of recovery and completion  block 3e 3       Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  The evaluator will ensure that the  stations to be recovered are in place and recoverable     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting  Tell him to recover survey control stations     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Collected the information on the station to be recovered                 2  Located the survey control station and navigated safely to it                   3  Described and made a sketch
227. res 052 260 1228 1  052 260 1228 2  and 052   260 1228 3      3   108    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps       00  vdvSn                   H     i                 31310880 SI 68 ONY 40 NOILIQ3 1002 1nr    0285 WHOS va                             JAU                                                                                                           SIVAYALNI             JO wns       S39Vd JO    ON    ON                        NI dWOO PUZ     LNI            3S     uit        JI             NOLLVZINVOHO NOILV2O1 Loaroud               QOY 30 30v   SIVAYAN                          3o wns   VENI  ul ui TI  13N                   QGWWAAAA            J   l PI  LNAWNYLSNI                            58                     QOQWYL S               jueuodoud eu  Lce         Wa ees         SIY  jo esn      4  SNIT3A31 38IAC334HL    Figure 052 260 1228 1  Sample of DA Form 5820 With Block Numbers    3   109    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    00 1A            313105890 SI 68 9NY 30 NOILIQ3          L002 TNF    0285 WHOS vd                ux   _ 9282              15181    9085  stel                Tavd  1880 _                                                   LNI dWO2 151       008 30 30v4  sHoiswova     5    Wad                         Odd            580    NOILVIS             184  S01 0F01  13N      3NI1                                LNIWNYLSNI    VA    Hoajog                                OOAWHL S  Kouobe jueuodoud ayy   6                985  uuo  511 jo esn Jog     
228. res for Field Artillery Survey  23  September 1993    Other Product Types  AISI OPERATOR   S MANUAL Automated Integrated Survey Instrument Operator   s Manual   DGPS OPERATOR   S MANUAL Differential Global Positioning System  DGPS  Operator s Manual     DMS FORM 5820 R Collimation Check  1 January 1997   NIMA FORM 8240 24 Theodolite Recording Sheet  1 August 1997   NIMA FORM 8900 2 Field Sheet EDME  1 June 1997   SP 241 Natural Tables for the Computation of Geodetic Positions  Clarke    Spheroid of 1866    Special Texts    DMS ST 005 Geometric Geodetic Accuracy Standards and Specifications for using  GPS Relative Positioning Techniques  1 July 1997   DMS ST 031 Standards and Specifications for Geodetic Control Networks  1 July  1997   DMS ST 032 Standards of Accuracy  and Specifications of Geodetic Surveys  1  October 1997   DMS ST 096 Real Time Kinematic with TrimMap Software Training Manual  1 January  1997   DMS ST 097 GPSurvey Software 2 2 Training Manual  1 January 1997   DMS ST 648 Automated Integrated Survey Instrument  AISI  Operations  1 March  1998    Technical Manuals   TM 5 6675 329 13 amp P Operator s  Organizational and Direct Support Maintenance Manual  Including Repair Parts and Special Tools for Self Leveling Surveying  Level  Wild Heerbrugg Model NA2 80   NSN 6675 01 101 4724   25  February 1982    TM 5 6675 332 10 Operator s Manual  Automated Integrated Survey Instrument  AISI   Type     Topographic Part Number 571146150  NSN 6675 01 372  0047  Type  Il  Co
229. rescribed specifications     Azimuth   The direction of one object from another  usually expressed as an angle in degrees relative to true north   azimuths are usually measured in the clockwise direction  thus an azimuth of 90   indicates that the  second object is due east of the first      Azimuth  grid   The angle in the plane of projection between a straight line and the central meridian  axis of Y  of a plane   rectangular coordinate system     Azimuth mark  The azimuth to a marked point or adjacent station that is visible from an occupied station  which is  determined for use in dependent surveys     Backsight  BS    In traversing  a backsight is a sight on a previously established traverse or triangulation station  which is  not the closing sight on the traverse  in leveling  a backsight is a reading on a rod that is held on a point  whose elevation has been previously determined and is not the closing sight of a level line     Central meridian    Glossary   9    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    The longitude of the horizontal center of a coordinate system  this longitude value is often the longitude  origin of the coordinate system   in the case of the transverse Mercator projection  the CM is the great  circle geodesic at which the projection surface  the cylinder  touches or is tangent to the earth     Collimation   The line of sight or aiming line of an instrument when coincident with the physical alignment of the  instrument  thus a collimation error is the angle between the 
230. rest minute     6  Determine the actual latitude prime    a  Turn on the computer and the monitor and allow the system to boot up in Windows    b  Click on  Start    Programs   and then the  MS DOS Command Prompt     c  Type CD and press the enter key to ensure that you are at the C  gt  prompt after the system has   restarted     Type CD SVY TABLES at the C  gt  prompt and press the enter key   e  Type TABLES at the C SVY TABLES prompt and press the enter key to start the program    NOTE  The first screen explains what the program does and prompts you to enter a letter            f  Enter any letter when prompted to  INPUT ANY LETTER     2   and press the enter key     3   142    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  NOTE  The next screen is  PROGRAM USER NOTES      g  Select one of the following at the  SELECT THE TYPE OF PROMPTS DESIRED  prompt     0   SHORT PROMPTS  1   LONG PROMPTS TO INCLUDE SAMPLES  NOTE  Select the LONG PROMPTS until you become accustomed to the program  Enter 1 and press  the enter key   h  Input the title  maximum number of characters is 60    i  Select the  ELLIPSOID  to be used for the computations   j  Select one of the following modes of computation     1   INDIVIDUAL POINT  2   TABLE  FROM BLOCK OF POINTS   NOTE  To determine the actual preliminary latitude  j    create a block of points around the seed latitude   Enter 2 and press the enter key   k  Input the latitude interval degrees  minutes  and seconds  DMS  for building the table   NOTE
231. rformance Steps    1  Check the eyepiece for parallax  Remove the parallax by pointing the instrument toward the sky and  rotating the eyepiece until the crosshairs appear sharp and intensely black     2  Check the level of the instrument  Adjust the instrument  if necessary     3  Locate and focus on the station s target to be observed   a  Point the instrument toward the target using the coarse sight for the telescope   b  Look through the eyepiece and rotate the focusing ring to focus on the target   c  Look through the eyepiece and fine tune the pointing of the instrument by using the two speed  vertical and horizontal controls       Tell the recorder the station name     Set the circle settings as provided by the recorder       Observe and read the direction to the initial station to the nearest second                A      Observe and read the direction to the forward station to the nearest second   a  Unlock the horizontal clamp and turn the instrument in a clockwise direction toward the forward  station   b  Focus and align the instrument on the target as recommended in step 3     8  Invert  plunge  the telescope  resight on the forward station  and read the direction to the nearest  second   a  Unlock the horizontal and vertical clamps   b  Invert the telescope and turn the instrument 180   to the same target   c  Focus and align the instrument on the target as recommended in step 3     9  Observe and read the direction to the initial station to the nearest second   
232. rho                    Determined and recorded the EC                   Computed the sea level reduction factor  C                      Computed the geodetic distance  S                          o N         Signed and dated the form                Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  NIMA FORM 8900 2    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Abstract Vertical Angles  VAs  Zenith Distances  205   052 260 1313    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given Department of the Army  DA  Form  5817 with observed VAs ZDs  DA Form 1943  Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  031   and a scientific calculator     Standards  Abstract VAs ZDs  Sum and mean the seconds of observed angles  Reject observations that  fall outside the mean rejection limits as prescribed by DMS ST 03  Transcribe all necessary VAs ZDs and  instrument and target heights from DA Form 5817 to DA Form 1943  Compute the abstract through t o  and the mean angle without error     Performance Steps    1  Fill out the headings on DA Form 1943 in blocks 1  Figures 052 260 1313 1 and 052 260 1313 2      Performance Steps    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    ABSTRACT OF ZENITH DISTANCES  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC     INSTR   TYPE   NO    1    ORGANIZATION   OBSERVER  1 1    TELESCOPE DIFF  OF  ABOV
233. rning  and caution  alert users to the possibility of immediate death  personal injury  or damage to  equipment  Notes provide a small  extra Supportive explanation or hint relative to the performance  measures     SOLDIER S RESPONSIBILITIES    1 5  Each soldier is responsible for performing individual tasks which the first line supervisor identifies  based on the unit s mission essential task list  METL   The soldier must perform the task to the standards  listed in the soldier s manual  SM   If a soldier has a question about how to do a task or which tasks in  this manual he must perform  it is the soldier s responsibility to ask the first line supervisor for clarification   The first line supervisor knows how to perform each task or can direct the soldier to the appropriate  training materials     NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER SELF DEVELOPMENT AND THE SOLDIER S MANUAL    1 6  Self development is one of the key components of the leader development program  It is a planned   progressive  and sequential program followed by leaders to enhance and sustain their military  competency  It consists of individual study  research  professional reading  practice  and self   assessment  Under the self development concept  the noncommissioned officer  NCO   as an Army  professional  has the responsibility to remain current in all phases of the MOS  The SM is the primary  source for the NCO to use in maintaining MOS proficiency     1 7  Another important resource for NCO self development is th
234. round at a 45   angle until it is solid     Remove the turning pin only upon the instrument operator s command       Compensate the pace count to adjust for any unbalanced length of sight        oa    C        Read the        thermometer  if necessary     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Select and mark two survey control  points at least 300 meters apart  Obtain the assistance of a leveling instrument operator who is qualified  according to task 052 260 1330 and will double as an assistant evaluator  Have the assistant score the  soldier s ability to plumb the level rod at each setup using the rod level   Check the rod levels before  testing to ensure that they are accurate   Physically inspect the marlin pins before they are pulled out of  the ground to ensure that they are solidly emplaced for each setup     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Show him the starting survey  control point  Explain to the soldier that this is a group task and that a GO or NO GO depends on the  performance of the group  Tell the soldier to perform as rodman     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Plumbed the level rod over the survey control point or turning point using the rod                level     2  Paced forwar
235. rraModel user s manual to find  edit  or change the  information as needed   e  Save the file after editing  Select the  SAVE  option   f  Select the  EXIT  option to return to the TerraModel Program     4  Enter the project control points  Enter the data using one of the following methods   a  Input data manually  Use the keyboard to create new points one at a time  Ensure that the point  number  name  and coordinates are entered    b  Create a file using the editor    1  Create a file named CONTROL PTS    2  Enter the names and coordinates for each point    3  Use the command PTSIN to transfer the control points to the working project    4  Make a new layer to store the points in  Store and assign the required attributes to the   layer     5  Process the raw data from the AISI     3   166    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps   a  Enter the traverse editor  From the command line type FIELDT and press the enter button    b  Type 41 for the number of viewable lines for the traverse editor        Type    or select the  TRAVIN  option   NOTE  At this point  the editor will compute the coordinates from the azimuth  distance  and difference in  elevation data using the AISI observations    d  Type LIST to list the generated new points to the PC screen or to a printer   NOTE  If this process fails to work  edit the control points file and the raw data file to ensure that they are  correct     6  Manage the processed data   a  Identify the objects that are listed and place them
236. s     Standards  Perform operator maintenance on a theodolite according to the applicable TMs and make  any adjustments that are necessary     Performance Steps    1  Wipe off the instrument with a clean  dry  lint free cloth   a  Take the instrument indoors after being used in moist weather   b  Open the transport case and remove the instrument   c  Allow the instrument to dry naturally   d  Allow condensation on the lenses to evaporate naturally     2  Clean the lenses with lens cleaning tissue and solution   a  Use caution when removing dust or sand from the lenses and reflectors   b  Never use    coarse or dirty cloth or hard paper   c  Use an antistatic lens paper  cotton wad  or lens brush  if possible      3  Inspect the instrument for damage or wear   a  Visually inspect the instrument for broken or missing parts   b  Check for cracked or scratched lenses or mirrors     4  Clean the carrying case and replace the desiccant   a  Open and remove the instrument   b  Turn the case over and shake out any loose dust and dirt   c  Check the exterior for damage   d  Inspect the clamps  locks  and carrying straps for defects   e  Inspect the desiccant for discoloration   f  Clean the case  as required     5  Test all the controls for correct operation      Rotate the three leveling foot screws and ensure that they turn freely and are stable     Inspect the telescope and horizontal clamps for improper operation      Inspect the horizontal and vertical slow motion screws for impr
237. s    Required Related  DA FORM 1942    3   122    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Subject Area 5  Differential Global Positioning System    Collect Data With Differential Global Positioning System  DGPS  Equipment  052 260 1401    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given a global positioning system  GPS   receiver with accessories  a tripod  a tribrach  a plumb bob  a tape measure  a four section  collapsible  height of instrument  HI  rod  a GPS recording sheet as prescribed by the unit s standing operating  procedure  SOP   and Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  SP  005 and 097     Standards  Collect data with the DGPS equipment  Set up the antenna over a prestablished point and  connect all cables to the receiver  Operate the DGPS receiver by performing the standing operating  procedure  SOP  required to collect data for a static GPS survey     Performance Steps    1  Transport the equipment to the work site   a  Place the receiver in the antenna container to transport it for static operations   b  Ensure that the following equipment  which is needed for static operations  is in large shipping  container    1  A 4 000 MSGR with a battery tray    2  Acompact L1 L2 with a ground plane  GP  antenna    3  Camcorder batteries    4  10 ampere hour batteries    5  A tribrach with an optical plummet device    6  A two piece tribrach adapter    7  Acompass    8  Antenna cable    9  An HI rod    10  An adjustable leg tripod     2  Set up the antenna   a  Set 
238. s 1c      Compute the unknown angle  1 by subtracting the two observed angles from 180   and enter    this information in block 1d       Enter the given side 2 3 that serves as the baseline in block 1e      Enter the station names that correspond to each side in blocks 11      Determine the sine of angle  1 and enter to eight decimal places in block 1g      Divide the given side 2 3 by the sine of angle  1 to determine the ratio  D  and enter to eight    decimal places in block 1h       Determine the sine of angle  2 and enter to eight decimal places in block 1i     Determine side 1 3 by multiplying the sine of angle  2 by ratio  D  and enter to three decimal    places in block 1    Determine the sine of angle  3 and enter to eight decimal places in block 1k     places in block 1   Sign and date the form in blocks 1m     2  Complete the universal transverse Mercator  UTM  grid position computation on DA Form 1938   Figures 052 260 1335 4 and 052 260 1353 5      STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    101A Vdvsn 45 834   8267 WHOS VG    AC AC    1055 9 V 1809    N V     1082  1509           1 9 Z 3 WIS                                       Figure 052 260 1335 4  Sample of DA Form 1938 With Block Numbers    3 23    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    101A Vds 15 834   826  INOS VG     QOWWAAAA           A8 03423H9  QOWWAAAA           A8 GaLNdWOD    1  55 9    1800 S N V           7 EM                  Pa  we    aessa    aooe         Dp             wem         __ 5      
239. s must be accurate  neat  and legible    Performance Steps  1  Check all field notes for omissions and errors  Correct any errors that are found     2  Enter all administrative and known data on DA Form 1942  Figures 052 260 1340 1 and 052 260   1340 2   Notify the supervisor if errors cause the rejection of the field data     3 118    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    007A 74057  31310580 SI   6 834 30                QOWWAAAA  3440          1002        2761 WHO                           39N3434410              1333    8313  3805012     DOAVUL st        wauodord                      Wa 225  sp Jo asn 204   13A31 40 NOWVINdWOd    ez  NOILVZINVOUO       l93r  td    eZ  INN       Figure 052 260 1340 1  Sample of DA Form 1942 With Block Numbers    3 119    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    00 LA vavsn  21310580 SI 49 933 30 NOILIQ3 LOOZ AYN  Ze6L WHOS Va    TTISO  1007 Uoo e4 OSS   GGWWAAAA  31VQ                 QQWWAAAA           A8 d31ndWO2                         DIN              ww a       owa mu         m err j  we   wr   ru               m                             u  w  me ume   wo  ue cmm _        d      S  p sw jj      se   cmm    ee mm  a    cu ue uc                     d    se yj wj we  BM S      1         51  1     199 30N3u34Jld saaw 1334    wy  SyuviW3u    A373 rav  A313  580  Wt 3ON3H333IG          HION31 NOILO3S            1510          0  0 0            CWN  43d NOIL238802  S31lIN  SW  INIT 30 HL5N31    61004                              MOL AVY
240. se the following phrase  To  reach the station from          4  A site description  Give the location of the station by using a magnetic compass and tape  measure  The description will be referenced to the station s reference marks or to  prominent durable features such as a road intersection or a building  for example  30  meters at an azimuth of 45  from the intersection of Main Street and Elm Road   Use the  following phrase  The station is located         NOTE  Do not use natural features in the site description that will change with time  for example  a tree  that is 20 centimeters in diameter will not be 20 centimeters in diameter 10 years later  These types of  features may be included in the sketch     5  The type of station  Describe the station in terms of material used  the configuration and  stamping on the mark  the height of the mark in reference to ground level  and whether or  not the mark has a subsurface monument  Use the following phrase  The station is  marked by          c  Describe any reference marks and include the following  block 3c    NOTE  This is not necessary if a reference mark is not present     1  A reference mark description     2  A magnetic azimuth from the main station to the reference mark     3  The distance from the main station to the reference mark  Measure to the nearest 1  centimeter     4  An azimuth and approximate distance to any prominent points that may assist in locating  the station    d  Make a sketch of the station in the a
241. sfer AISI data     Standards  Postprocess data for the AISI using a microprocessor  Postprocess the data according to the  standards set forth in the project directive  the unit s standing operating procedure  SOP   and the AISI  operator s manual and the recommended procedures in DMS ST 648     Performance Steps    1  Open a project directory   a  Start the TerraModel Program   b  Select the option to configure the system   c  Specify a prototype file name and complete the data in the dialog box  Press the enter button or  select  OK    d  Select  FILE  and the  NEW PROJECT  option   e  Type in a project name and press the enter button or select  OK      2  Download data from the AISI   a  Connect the AISI to the computer using the computer geodimeter cable   b  Enter the  GEOCAP  module within the TerraModel Program  From the command line  type  GEOCAP   c  Type T to transfer data or select the option to transfer a file from the AISI to the computer   d  Type JI for job in or select the  JOB IN  option to transfer a job file from the directory in the  AISI   e  Select the job file from the directory in the AISI and transfer it to the PC     Convert the job file  Type  C  or select the option to convert the file to a  TRV    TXT   or  PTS   file          3  Open a job file for editing   a  Type FILE EDITOR from the command line   b  Select  GEOCAP   then  GEO FILE  and  FILE EDITOR    c  Open an existing file or create a new file   d  Use the basic editing features in the Te
242. should not exceed   0 010 meters from the mean     7  Check DA Form 5819 to ensure that it is complete and correct     8  Turn off and store the instrument     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldiers with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Select and mark two stations  The  distance between the two should exceed 400 meters  Obtain the help of a recorder who is qualified  according to task 052 260 1225  The reflector will be set up and ready  The height of instrument  HI  and  the height of reflector will be measured     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Show him the distance to be  measured  Also explain that there will be a qualified recorder assigned and that the HI and the height of  reflector will be given to the recorder  Tell the soldier that achieving the actual job standard depends on  the performance of a team  Since he is only part of the team  a GO or NO GO will be based on the  demonstration of correct measuring procedures  Tell him to measure distances with an EDME     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Set up and plumbed the EDME over the survey station                    Turned on the power and entered the atmospheric data               Aligned the EDME with the reflector                    Measured and read the distances        
243. sly established mark is required  If the  spot where a station mark was located can be  reproduced by measurement given in the description   the station is not destroyed  The reproduced spot  should be tied in by azimuth and distance and the  estimated accuracy of the reproduced location given   If a new mark is set in the exact location of a  previously established but destroyed mark  the  designation of the station should be identical with the  original with only a new date added to its designation   If a new disk is set in the approximate location of the  old station  the name should be preserved but the  number  2  and a new date should be added         DESCRIBED   RECOVERED  BY    3e 1        PROJECT    3e 2           FIELD BOOK       8                 REVERSE OF DA FORM 1959  OCT 64    USAPA V1 00    Figure 052 260 1323 1  Sample of DA Form 1959 With Block Numbers  Continued        STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps         TYPE OF MARK STATION   Germany 170 Monument Stone Kamp  LOCALITY STAMPING ON MARK  LATITUDE LONGITUDE DATUM DATUM   49  28  10 47467  10  23  10 925197  WGS 84 Amsterdam   NORTHING   EASTING   FT     EASTING   NORTHING   FT    GRID AND ZONE ESTABLISHED BY  AGENCY    5 480 852 200  M    600 444 268  M  32U 320  Engineer   NORTHING   EASTING   FT     EASTING   NORTHING   FT   nip AND ZONE ORDER    M   M  November 96 Third    GRID AZIMUTH  ADD    E y TO THE GEODETIC AZIMUTH  GRID AZ   ADD   SUB             TO THE GEODETIC AZIMUTH    BACK AZIMUTH GEO
244. ssions on  DA Form 1962  Figure 052 260 2460 1      3   134    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps              PROJECT TABULATION OF GEODETIC DATA  Example  For use of this form  see FM 3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC   LOCATION ORGANIZATION  Luckytown Engineer Company    D 0 50    D 50 100   D 0 200    D 0 100   D 0 300    D 0 150                49 997   49 998                199 995   99 996  99 997   0 002   Z2    D 150 300    299 993   149 996 0 002   Z3          D 0 400    D 0 200    D 200 400      199 996    D 0 500    D 0 250    D 250 500    499 992   249 996   249 995                  D0300             TABULATED BY    DATE                       CHECKED BY DATE  YYYYMMDD   SSG J  Zambrano 2001 05 22    DA FORM 1962  FEB 57 EDITION OF FEB 57 IS OBSOLETE  USAPA V1 01          Mean caib cosa        0 001    0 002     0 008    6    NOTE  No  distances deviate from   the mean by more than  0 002 meters           Z4   75   Z6  6    0 002   0 001                      0 001   0 003   6                                                                                                                                                               Figure 052 260 2460 1  Completed Sample of DA Form 1962         135    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    NOTE  D is the distance           in meters         2 is the calibration constant         D 0 50    D 50 100     b  D 0 200    D 0 100     c  D 0 300    D 0 150     d  D 0 400    D 0 200     e  D 0 500    D 0 250    
245. station and the observed station      Told the recorder what target was being observed      Measured the HI with the help of the recorder or evaluator      Made a direct pointing on the target      Observed and read the direct reading on the target      Repeated steps 7 and 8 in the reverse position      Repeated steps 7 through 9 for the second position       Rejected positions that were not within specifications and reobserved them  if it    was necessary     NO GO    Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 5817 TM 5 6675 332 10  DMS ST 031    3   100    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Subject Area 4  Level    Determine the Level Error       052 260 1109    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given Defense Mapping School  DMS   Form 5820 R  the stadia constant for the instrument  a leveling instrument  an instrument operator and  two rodmen with level rods  and turning pins     Standards  Determine the level error  C   Field recordings must be neat and legible  Complete all  computations and ensure that they contain no errors     Performance Steps    1  Fill out the headings on DMS Form 5820 R  according to task 052 260 1228  in blocks 1  Figures  052 260 1109 1 and 052 260 1190 2     3   101    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    2nd COMP INT    1       Time    1    D
246. stem  DGPS  Equipment    Collect Site Information for Differential Global   Positioning System  DGPS  Planning       1  General    2   Automated  Integrated  Survey  Instrument    052 260 2338    052 260 2340    052 260 2460    052 260 2466    052 260 2470    052 260 2479  052 260 2482  052 260 2491  052 260 2492    052 260 2486    Skill Level 2        Perform Operator Maintenance on Theodolites    Supervise Operator Maintenance of Survey  Equipment    Compute the Instrument Constant for Electronic  Distance Measuring Equipment    Convert Universal Transverse Mercator  UTM   Grid Coordinates to Geodetic Coordinates    Convert Geodetic Coordinates to Universal  Transverse Mercator  UTM  Grid Coordinates    Compute the Convergence  Compute Datum Transformations  Check Intersection Computations  Establish a Declination Station    Postprocess Automated Integrated Surveying  UNIT    Instrument  AISI  Data    3  Traverse    4  Level    5  Differential  Global  Positioning  System    052 260 2487    052 260 2488    052 260 2489    052 260 2490    052 260 2332    052 260 2333    052 260 2334    052 260 2335    052 260 2504    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Check Horizontal Field Data    Check Vertical Angle  VA  Zenith Distance  ZD   Field Data    Check Distance Data  Compute a Geodetic Traverse    Perform Operator Maintenance on a Leveling  Instrument    Check Level Data    Download Data From the Differential Global   Positioning System  DGPS  Receiver    Process Differential Global Positioni
247. t  relevel the antenna  and remeasure the HI    e  Measure the HI once in feet for verification    f  Have an assistant hold the end of a tape measure on the station and measure to the bottom  inside edge of the notches    g  Measure the HI three times using three sides of the antenna to confirm the HI and to check the  level and enter this information on the recording sheet    h  Measure the HI once in feet for verification     5  Interconnect all required components   a  Remove the antenna cable and unroll it to its full length   b  Connect one end of the cable to the antenna and the other end to the receiver   c  Ensure that there are at least two camcorder batteries in the receiver  Connect one 10 ampere   hour battery to power port 1     6  Set up the receiver   a  Turn on the receiver about 10 minutes before the session   b  Set the MSGR into the Standard Positioning Service  SPS  mode if not selected    1  Press the CLEAR button     Press the CONTROL button     Go to menu 7 of 8     Select L1 L2 OPERATION     Change L2 TRACKING to the PE SPS mode     Press the ENTER button     Press the STATUS button   NOTE  The receiver is now locked onto the satellite vehicles  SVs    c  Press the LOG DATA button   d  Select MORE   e  Select SETUP SURVEY CONTROLS   f  Select MODIFY QUICK START CONTROLS   NOTE  Normally  the settings should be as follows      2   3   4   5   6   7    ELEV MASK 15    MIN SVS 03  MEAN SYNC TIME 15 0 SEC  g  Select ACCEPT   h  Select MORE   NOTE  The MSG
248. test  Tell him the location where the  monument is to be emplaced  Tell him if any required azimuth or reference marks or witness posts are  needed  Specify the permanent point type to be emplaced at the location and tell him where the required  tools and materials are  Tell him that this is a group task and that individual and group evaluations will be  done  Tell him to emplace a permanent survey control point     Performance Measures GO NOGO       1  Selected the tools that were needed for the monument to be emplaced or marked                   2  Positioned the survey control point so that it could not be destroyed or moved                 3  Emplaced the survey monument                 4      Established an azimuth or a reference mark or a witness post for each permanent                    survey control point     Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1959  EM 1110 1 1002    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Sketch and Describe the Location of a Survey Control Station  052 260 1213    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given Department of the Army  DA  Form  1958 or 1959  a 1 50 000 map of the area where the control point s  are located  a plotting scale  a  compass  a 30 meter tape measure  a straightedge  and an identified survey control station     Standards  Sketch a
249. th the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to establish a declination  station     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1  Located a declination station that was convenient to the using unit s  and away        from magnetic attractions     2  Established a declination station                 Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly    References    Required Related  DA FORM 1934    3  164    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    References  Required Related  FM 6 2    3   165    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Subject Area 2  Automated Integrated Survey Instrument    Postprocess Automated Integrated Surveying Instrument  AISI  Data  052 260 2486    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor  given an AISI with data from a survey project  field notes for the  data  coordinates for the project control points used  appropriate AISI accessories  a desktop personal  computer  PC  with the TerraModel Drafting Program  an alternating current  AC  power source  the  TerraModel user s manual  Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  648  and instructions on  how to use the TerraModel Drafting Program and to tran
250. the receiver  do not kink the cable    d  Remove the antenna  adapter  and tribrach from the tripod   e  Place all equipment in the correct storage container     f  Place the cap on the tripod and return it to the travel configuration     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to collect data with the  DGPS equipment     Performance Measures    1            o N O      A    PD                       Transported the equipment to the work site      Setup the antenna      Entered administrative data on the recording sheet      Measured and recorded the antenna s height on the recording sheet     Interconnected all required components      Set up the receiver      Operated the receiver to collect static data      Entered the site data into the receiver      Entered the site data on the recording sheet      Ended the survey       Disconnected all components     NO GO         125    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DMS ST 005  DMS ST 097    3   126    STP 5 82D1
251. the recording sheet     a   b     C     d   e     Identify the possible obstructions to the observation    Measure and record the azimuth in degrees and minutes to the center  left edge  and right edge  of the object using a compass    Measure and record the vertical angle  VA  in degrees and minutes to the center  left edge  and  right edge of the object using an inclinometer    Describe the object    Record multiple measurements for the entire area that a large object covers     NOTE  Continue observations for all possible obstructing objects     6  Plot the observations on the recording sheet     a   b   C     Plot each individual point observed in terms of azimuth and elevation   Connect the perimeter of the points   Shade in the enclosed area of the obstructing object     7  Identify and record possible radio or multipath problems on the recording sheet  Note any large  object that may cause a problem with the multipath     8  Reconnoiter the route between all points to be surveyed  Identify any overhead obstructions that  would prohibit the use of the kinematic survey method on the recording sheet     3   127    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting
252. the survey mark  If it is not  repeat steps 1a through c    d  Remove the tripod cover and attach the EDME to the tribrach    e  Move the EDME on the head of the tripod to bring the plumb bob directly over the survey mark   The base of the EDME will not overhang the tripod head  Firmly tighten the EDME to the tripod    f  Ensure that the battery is fully charged and attached to the EDME    g  Level the tribrach bull s eye bubble using the tribrach foot screws     2  Turn on the power and enter the atmospheric data   NOTE  Refer to the appropriate TM for the EDME being used   a  Temperature   b  Barometric pressure   c  Parts per million  ppm  value  if necessary  Refer to Table 052 260 1326 1 to determine the  ppm from the mean temperature and barometric pressure     Meters Rod in Meters  0 to 27   50 0           01027 ____   27 0 10 46 8  46 8 to 60 4     89510973        06         Table 052 260 1326 1  Corrections Applied to Distances    3  Align the EDME with the reflector  Alternately align the horizontal and vertical tangent screws to  acquire a return signal from the reflector     4  Measure and read the distance     5  Repeat performance step 4 for the required number of readings   NOTE  A complete measurement consists of ten readings  For higher order specifications  refer to the  standards and specifications in DMS ST 031     3 94    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    6  Repeat the observations if the accuracy does not meet the specifications   NOTE  Readings 
253. ting   Ee       STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  a  Compute the En by using the following formula  Record it to three decimal places with the sign  in block 16a     En   computed dN   fixed dN   1  Algebraically add the column of dNs to get the computed dN    2  Subtract the fixed starting northing from the fixed ending northing to get the fixed dE   b  Compute the Ee by using the following formula  Record it to three decimal places with the sign  in 6b     Ee   computed dE   fixed dE   1  Algebraically add the column of dEs to get the computed dE    2  Subtract the fixed starting easting from the fixed ending easting to get the fixed dE     17  Compute the linear error of closure  LEC  by using the following formula  Record it to four decimals  places in block 17     LEC   the square root of the sum of the values   En squared     Ee squared      18  Compute the ratio of closure  RC  by dividing the length of the traverse  in meters  by the LEC  Use  the following formula  Round down to the nearest 100  Record the value in block 18     RC   1  length of traverse  in meters  LEC  NOTE  The accuracy of a traverse is the ratio of error to the total length of traverse  The accuracy is  normally expressed as    ratio of  one to something   The RC must meet the specifications for the order  of work being performed  Third order specifications require an RC of 1 10 000 and are found in DMS ST  031  If the traverse does not meet these specifications  no further computations are
254. tion order   pass  passed  barometric pressure  mean radius of curvature  p squared   Prime Power Program  p cubed   p to the fourth power   p to the fifth power   pamphlet   personal computer  politically correct  point code   private first class   pages   Primary Leadership Development Course  point number   Program 0   parts per million   program   private  point of vertical tangency   power    q squared    Q3  Q4  Q5  Q6  QT  R  RC  REC  Reciprocal observations  REF  reg  RHO    5    SD  sec  Sep  SGT  SIN  SL  SLC  SM  SMCT  SOP  SPHER L  SPS  SS  SSG    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    q cubed   q to the fourth power   q to the fifth power   q to the sixth power   quarterly   reverse  right  radius of curvature  rewind  reserve component   radioelectronic combat  not a United States term   recorder  See reciprocal angles    reference   Regiment  regulation  register   radius of curvature  denoted by P     secret  safe  grid distance  geodetic distance  second  slope distance   start    solvent  dry cleaning  self destruct  special duty  slope distance  second  section   September   sergeant   sine   skill level   sea level coefficient   soldier s manual   soldier s manual of common tasks  standing operating procedure  spheroidal   Standard Positioning Service  stringer spacing  side shot    staff sergeant    Glossary   7    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    station angle    STD  STN   STP  SUST  SV    T    TAN   TEL   TG   TM   TNG   TOE  TRADOC  Trk   UD   US  USAPPC  USASMA  USD  UTM   V   VA
255. to accept and store the corrections  if acceptable     NOTE  A minimum of two pointings must be made  and the same number of pointings must be made in  the direct and reverse positions     6  Perform the tilt axis test measurements   NOTE  The collimation test must be performed before the tilt axis test   a  Press the YES button at the  TILT AXIS   prompt   b  Rotate the instrument to the reverse position   c  Aim the center of the crosshair at a well defined point that is at least 13 5    zenith distance   40   76 5    above the horizon   d  Press the A M button  A beep will sound   NOTE  A continuous beep will sound if the sighting exceeds the limit  If it does  reaim the crosshair and  press the A M button again   e  Reaim the crosshair by approaching the target from another direction   f  Press the A M button   g  Repeat steps 6c through f in the direct position   NOTE  A minimum of two pointings must be made  and the same number of pointings must be made in  the direct and reverse positions   h  Press the YES button at the  STORE   prompt  which will be displayed if the correction factor  just determined is within   00    01    i  Press the YES button at the  FAIL REMEASURE   prompt if the correction factor exceeds    00  01  to repeat the test   NOTE  If the test continuously fails  bad sightings are being made  the target is too close  or the  instrument needs to be readjusted by the manufacturer     7  Set the horizontal plates   a  Point the instrument at a target   
256. ty precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met  Select and mark three stations  The  distance between the stations should be greater than 100 meters  The instrument will be set up according  to task 052 260 1134 and the target will be set up according to task 052 260 1122  The angle between  the stations should be greater than 45    Obtain the help of a recorder who is qualified according to task  052 260 1226     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Show him the station to be  occupied and the two stations to be observed  Tell him which station is to be the initial station  Tell him to  measure horizontal directions with a theodolite     Performance Measures GO NOGO  1  Checked the eyepiece for parallax  Removed the parallax  if it was necessary                    Checked the level of the instrument  Adjusted the instrument  if it was necessary                    Located and focused      the station s target to be observed                    Told the recorder the station name                    Set the circle settings as provided by the recorder                    Observed and read the direction to the initial station to the nearest second                     Observed and read the direction to the forward station to the nearest second                                   A              Inverted the telescope  resighted on the forward station  and
257. ude    N   10 000 000   N   Use this formula if the station is in the southern latitude        Compute the easting prime  E   by using the following formula and record it in block 6c     E     IV p    V p3      5   5    where     IV   Tabular value 4   V   Tabular value 5   85   Tabular value   5   p    0001 times the difference in longitude or p   the difference in longitude divided by 10 000  p3   p cubed   p5   p to the fifth power      Compute the easting  E  by using one of the following formulas and record it to three decimal    places in block 6d     E   500 000   E   Use this formula if the station is east of the central meridian of the grid zone    E   500 000   E   Use this formula if the station is west of the central meridian of the grid zone      7  Sign and date the form in blocks 7     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier  Give the soldier a safety briefing before starting the test  Tell him to convert geodetic  coordinates to UTM grid coordinates     Performance Measures GO NOGO    1      Filled in the headings on DA Form 1932     Computed and recorded the difference in longitude     2  3   4  5    Computed and recorded the p value       Computed and recorded the values of p2  p3  p4  p5  and          Generate
258. ue and solution      Inspected the instrument for damage or wear      Cleaned the carrying case and replaced the desiccant      Tested all the controls for correct operation      Tested the horizontal and vertical collimation      Inspected the battery and connection accessories  if it was appropriate     Adjusted the plate level  if it was needed      Adjusted the circular level  if it was needed      Adjusted the optical plumb  if it was needed      Adjusted the tension on the three leveling foot screws  if it was needed       Tested the instrument s lighting system     3   130    GO    NO GO    STP 5 82D12 SM TG  Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly   References    Required Related  TM 5 6675 332 10    3 131    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Supervise Operator Maintenance of Survey Equipment  052 260 2340    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a secure field location  during daylight hours with no  precipitation  given either a traverse  a global positioning system  GPS   or leveling survey equipment  a  tripod  appropriate accessories  the maintenance manual or applicable technical manual  TM  for the  equipment  the appropriate cleaning materials  an adjusting pin  an instrument operator  and Department  of the Army  DA  Form 2404     Standards  Supervise the soldier performing preventative maintenance and checks  Instruct the op
259. ule                    Set the adjustment controls                    Adjusted the network              Displayed and checked the adjustment results                     Edited the network adjustment results                           o N O    A C PD             Readjusted the network                                   Completed a minimally constrained adjustment                         N      Saved the network to disk         3   200    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DGPS OPERATOR   S MANUAL  DMS ST 096  DMS ST 097    3   201    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    APPENDIX A   DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY  DA  FORM 5164 R  HANDS ON EVALUATION     A 1  This appendix provides a copy of DA Form 5164 R  Locally reproduce DA Form 5164 R on 8 1 2   by 11 inch paper     A 2  The use of this form is optional  but highly encouraged  This evaluation allows you to maintain and  track the soldier s proficiency at the performance level     A 3  Use the following instructions to complete DA Form 5164 R  Enter the title and number of the task  to be evaluated at the top of the form     Enter in column  a  the number of each performance step from the evaluation guide     Enter in column  b  each performance step from the evaluation guide that corresponds to the  number in column  a   Abbreviate information  
260. up the tripod and ensure that it is plumb over the station   b  Remove the tripod cover and secure it   c  Place and secure the tribrach on the tripod   d  Accurately plumb the tribrach over the station and level it using the tribrach s  circular bubble   e  Mount and lock the antenna platform using the two piece tribrach adapter on the tribrach   f  Orient the antenna to the north   g  Tighten the horizontal clamp on the tribrach adapter to prevent the antenna from moving   h  Attach the antenna cable to the receiver and the antenna   i  Check the tribrach s level bubble and relevel  if necessary     3  Enter administrative data on the recording sheet     4  Measure and record the antenna s height on the recording sheet   NOTE  The height of the antenna can be measured by using a four section collapsible HI rod or a tape  measure  Use steps 4a through e when using the HI rod and steps 4f through h when using the tape  measure  Indicate the method used to measure the HI     a  Assemble the four section collapsible HI rod     b  Place the point of the HI rod at the center of the station   c  Read the Hl rod graduations from the bottom inside edge of the notches     3   123    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps   d  Measure the HI three times using three diametrically opposite holes to confirm the HI and enter  this information on the recording sheet  Check the antenna to see if it is level  All three  measurements should be within 1 millimeter of each other  If they are no
261. ure  EC  and the allowable error  AE  for the completed level  line   a  Tabulate the one way distances for the F DIST and B DIST runs of the section and circle the  shorter of the two and enter the amount in block 13a     3 113    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    b     C     d          Tabulate the differences in elevation for the FDE and BDE runs of the section and enter this  amount in block 13b    Algebraically add the two DEs and list the sum as EC to represent the EC for the section   Record this sum to four decimal places in block 13c    Determine the AE to third order specification for the section and enter it in block 13d  Use the  following formula     AE     0 012 meters times the square root of the distance in Km   where      Km   Shortest one way distance of the section in kilometers       Truncate and enter the AE to four decimal places in block 13e  The section is  good  or has    met the specifications if the EC is equal to or less than the value for the AE       Conduct a final check  Both the instrument operator and the computers for the project will    conduct a final check  Each person will initial the form in blocks 13f     14  Initial the form in block 14     Evaluation Preparation  Setup  Provide the soldier with the items that are listed in the conditions  statement  Ensure that all safety precautions are followed  The evaluator will prepare the field area and  equipment in advance to ensure that the task standards can be met     Brief Soldier
262. ures is  important  At least three measurements within  01 foot  should be made from the station to any permanent  marks  features  or structures that would permit  relocating the spot where an instrument was centered     Good judgment should be exercised as to how far these  measurements should be made  It is recommended that  they be made to items which are not in the immediate  vicinity of the station  Angles should also be turned to  these items     particularly where no azimuth mark or marks have  been established     b  VIEW  Provide information on height of tower  or stand used in occupying or establishing the station  and information on view from a normal tripod  i e   a  50 foot tower was used at the station  view from a  tripod height is clear to the south and east but is  obstructed by rise in ground  by 50foot trees  to the  north and west     c  PHOTOGRAPHIC IDENTIFICATION   Provide when possible  two measurements from the  station to natural or cultural features which might be  visible on aerial photography and a description of the  terrain  If photographs are available identify the  station thereon and note estimated accuracy of the  identification     d  NOTES ON RECOVERED STATIONS  A  diligent search should be made for ALL previously  established stations in the vicinity and no station  should be reported as destroyed unless conclusive  evidence of destruction is present  A statement of the  diligence of the search and reason for the nonrecovery  of a previou
263. ustment module   a  Select  ADJUST  from the GPSurvey main menu   b  Select the global positioning system  GPS  network icon and double click on it     2  Build the network from the TRIMVEC directory    a  Select  BUILD THE GPS NETWORK     b  Clear the current network before adding vectors    c  Check the network status display  Ensure that the following information is correct     1  Network  the name of the network      2  Datum  the current datum      3  Solutions  the number of solution files loaded      4  Baselines  the number of GPS vectors in the network      5  Unique vectors  the total baselines minus the number of redundant measurements     6  Stations  the number of stations in the network     d  Select  VIEW VECTORS   Inspect the result to see if the vectors are reasonable for the  equipment and techniques used  For example  when observing a static session  expect an error  of   5 millimeters   1 parts per million  ppm  for each kilometer of the baseline length    e  Press the escape  ESC  button to exit the network map     3  Summarize the network   a  Check the  APPARENTLY DUPLICATED STATIONS   look for naming problems    b  Check the  REDUNDANT BASELINES   look for redundancy and for errors    c  Check the  GLOBAL NETWORK CLOSURES   look for decimeter or greater errors    NOTE  List any problems found by solution number and by station or stations     4  Save the GPS network to a disk   5  Enter the network adjustment module  Select  NETWORK ADJUSTMENT      6  S
264. w the procedures and minimum requirements for setting up each type of monument   a  Emplace precast concrete or cut stone monuments  see Note 1      1  Dig a hole deep enough to accommodate the main monument as well as the subsurface  marker  if required  Dig the hole as narrow as possible so that the main monument  when  tamped in place  will fit with as little chance of lateral movement as possible     2  Go to step 3a 4  if a subsurface marker is not required  If a subsurface marker is required   emplace the subsurface marker  set up a plumb bench over the hole  mark the plumb  position on the horizontal board  and remove one nail and slide the board out of the way   making sure that the stakes are not moved     3  Cover the subsurface marker with 0 06 meters of sand or soil  Whenever a survey marker  disk is used  to mark the plumb point and identify the station name   mark the disk before  putting it in the monument  see Note 2      4  Insert the permanent monument in the hole and have at least two other people support it  until the rest of the hole is filled and tamped  as required  If a subsurface marker is used   align the plumb mark of the stone with the mark on the plumb bench before backfilling the  hole  The amount of exposed stone on the surface depends on the type of monument  being emplaced and the project or mission directive     5  Establish azimuth and reference marks  as required     STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps  NOTES   1  A precast concrete monu
265. w to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1943  DA FORM 5817  DMS ST 031    3   171    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    3 172    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Check Distance Data  052 260 2489    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor  given Department of the Army  DA  Form 5819 or National  Imagery and Mapping Agency  NIMA  Form 8900 2  the project directive  a scientific calculator  and  Defense Mapping School  DMS  Special Text  ST  031     Standards  Check distance data  All entries on DA Form 5819 or NIMA Form 8900 2 must be complete   neat  and legible and conform to third class specifications and the unit s standing operating procedure   SOP   Correct any errors or omissions that are found     Performance Steps    1  Check DA Form 5819 or NIMA Form 8900 2 to ensure that all entries are complete  neat and legible  and that the       Project name and organization blocks are complete and accurate      Date and approximate distance blocks are complete and accurate      Azimuth of line  mean latitude  and calibration date blocks are complete and accurate      Observer and recorder blocks are complete and accurate      Master remote or instrument target blocks are complete and accurate      Height of instrument  HI   height of target  HT   eccentricity  and instrument target numbers  blocks are complete and accurate                    2  Check DA Form 5819               Form 8900 2 to ensure the accuracy of distances measured  Note  any errors or omissions  Ensure that    a  
266. where appropriate                   Abstracted the observed VAs ZDs from DA Form 5817                   Computed and entered the mean VA ZD      DA Form 1943                   Ensured that the VAs ZDs met the rejection limits                     Completed the data on the target shown on DA Form 1943                         o N O C      Signed and dated DA Form 1943                   Evaluation Guidance  Score the soldier GO if all steps are passed  P   Score the soldier NO GO if any  step is failed  F   If the soldier fails any step  show him how to do it correctly     References  Required Related  DA FORM 1943  DA FORM 5817  DMS ST 031    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Absiract Horizontal Angles  HAs   052 260 1314    Conditions  As a topographic surveyor in a field environment  given observed horizontal directions   Department of the Army  DA  Form 1916  a scientific calculator  and Defense Mapping School  DMS   Special Text  ST  031     Standards  Abstract horizontal directions  Sum and mean the seconds of observed angles  Reject  observations that fall outside the mean rejection limits as prescribed by DMS ST 031  Compute the  horizon closure and corrected angles  All entries must be neat and legible     Performance Steps    1  Fill out the headings on DA Form 1916 in blocks 1  Figures 052 260 1314 1 and 052 260 1314 2      STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Performance Steps    ABSTRACT OF HORIZONTAL DIRECTIONS   For use of this form  see      3 34 331  the proponent agency is TRADOC   LOCATION
267. y Correspondence Course Program  adjust   atomic energy  allowable error   angular error of closure   automatic integrated survey instrument  advanced individual training   annually   Advanced Noncommissioned Officers Course  Antenna   approximate   April   Army regulation  armor   Army Training and Evaluation Program  attention    August    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    Glossary   1    STP 5 82D12 SM TG    AZ   B   B DIST  B6   BA  BDE  BM  BNCOC  BS  BW   C6  CHRON  Cl   CL   CM  CMF  Comp  CORR  CORR N  COS  CPL    CSM    D6   DA Form  DA Pam  DA     DCSOPS    Glossary   2    azimuth   width of the T beam  width of the stringers  filler block  backward  bulb  backward distance   Table value B6   biannually   brigade  backward difference in elevation  bimonthly  benchmark   Basic Noncommissioned Officers Course  backsight   biweekly   Table value C6   chronological   counterintelligence  coordinating installation  close internal  combat lifesaver  centerline  clear  centimeter s    career management field   Compressor  computer   correction   correction   cosine   corporal   command sergeant major    a common size  deflection  depth of stringers  slab depth  fill depth   depth cover  ratio  direct  difference in elevation    Table value D6   Department of the Army Form  Department of the Army Pamphlet  Department of the Army    Deputy Chief of Staff for Operations and Plans    DDD MMSS  DE   Dec   Delta northing  DH   DIFF   DIST   DMS   DN   DPGS    DV    E1   E2   E3   E4   E5   E
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
  Safer Brand 5730 Instructions / Assembly    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file